JP2023174975A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately executing a performance.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, a sound performance by a speaker device 64 is executed by a sound generated by sound generation processing by each sound source IC. In this case, a first sound source IC generates a first sound of a length of a first period, a second sound source IC generates a second sound of a length of the first period of the same length as the first sound on a first sound source IC side, and then generates a third sound of a length of a second period. The second sound is set to a sound in which a player cannot identify an output sound. The first to third sounds are generated by the first sound source IC and the second sound source IC so that a series of sound performances are executed in which the third sound is identified subsequent to the first sound.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which an internal lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding slot machines, when the start lever is operated while medals are being bet as gaming media, an internal lottery is carried out, the reels begin to rotate, and the reels stop while they are rotating. When the switch is operated, the reels stop rotating. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the internal lottery result, a benefit is given according to the result (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In this type of gaming machine, a sound production means such as a speaker may perform a sound production as a type of production corresponding to the result of the internal lottery.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707

Here, in the game machine exemplified above, optimization of the presentation is required, and for example, there is still room for improvement regarding the sound presentation.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably perform effects.

The invention according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine comprising a sound reproduction means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by a sound information generation means,
The sound information generating means includes:
a first sound information generation means for generating first sound information;
a second sound information generating means for generating second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information and third sound information following the second sound information;
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound;
It is characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by the sound reproducing means reproducing the sound based on the first sound information and the sound based on the third sound information.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform effects.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door closed. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the front door. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between symbols and effective lines that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal game state. It is a flow chart showing reel control processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. 3 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. It is a flowchart which shows bonus state processing. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop button and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is an explanatory diagram showing transition relations of each state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes. It is a flowchart which shows lottery result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart showing the first specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the second specific combination processing. It is a flowchart showing the third specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transition notification. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of press order notification. It is a flowchart which shows push order processing. It is a flowchart showing winning result corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the number of games management process. 3 is a flowchart showing end determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for specialized zones. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the time of bet. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the press order notification process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a notification timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at each stop operation. It is a diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional effects. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of a full stop. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus notification. It is a flowchart showing specific winning combination notification processing. It is a flowchart which shows continuous production setting processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display performance by a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display performance by a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display performance by a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display performance by a liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display performance by a liquid crystal display device. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of continuous performance. It is a flowchart which shows production data setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing display data setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between presentation contents and presentation commands, and display data. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing by the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows sound data setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between performance contents and sound data. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between sound data and sound source data. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a set of output data. It is a flowchart which shows the sound generation process by sound source IC. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between silent data and volume data. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between frame update timing of display performance and sound data. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between production contents and sound data in the second embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between frame update timing of display performance and sound data. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the difference between the number-of-games management type performance and the time management type performance in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows sound data setting processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the generation point of a specific sound in a special performance in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects by a main control device. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between special effects and sound data.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention applied to a reel-type gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine, and specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 4 is the front side. FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12 and a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed into a box shape with an open front as a whole, and is attached to so-called island equipment by nailing or the like when installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a, 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. Further, the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by operating a predetermined key on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game status. Three vertically elongated display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Note that the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. . Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, 26R, respectively. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly explained.

Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is configured to be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying, for example, a 504-pulse drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as excitation pulse), and this excitation pulse changes the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. controlled. Further, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has rotated once is installed on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, the main controller 101 changes the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

A plurality of symbols serving as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch one symbol to the next symbol at a predetermined position, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses. In addition, the main controller 101 can grasp the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Control can be performed such as stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 6 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, numbers 0 to 20 are assigned corresponding to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. This is a number for recognition, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

The symbols include the "Red Bell" symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), the "1st Replay" symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L), and the "Red 7" symbol (for example, the 18th on the left reel 32L). ), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 17th on left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., 12th on left reel 32L), "2nd Replay" symbol (e.g., 11th on left reel 32L) , "White 7" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L), "Youth" There are 10 types of symbols (for example, number 0 on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols are completely different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that out of 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel, only 3 symbols can be visually recognized in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

In this slot machine 10, the game results of each game are reported using combinations of a total of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, a combination of these three symbols is, for example, by tying the upper symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R as shown in FIG. The combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1, the combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 that connects the middle symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the lower symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the downward-sloping line L4 connecting the upper symbol on the left reel 32L, the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol on the right reel 32R, the lower symbol on the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol on the middle reel 32M. There are combinations of symbols that stop on the upward-sloping line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are also combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the bending line L6 is a line that bends in the middle when the symbols are lined up. It should be noted that there are other combinations of symbols that stop on the bending line other than the bending line L6, but their explanation will be omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set depending on the number of bets on medals, and when symbols stop in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line, As a result of winning a prize, the player is given a privilege in which a predetermined number of medals as game media are paid out, or a privilege in which the game state is changed. On the other hand, if the symbols stop in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no prize is won and the above benefits are not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the downward-sloping line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lines, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4, There are cases where the combination line is an effective line, and cases where only the bending line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when the game is started with 3 medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is considered as the valid line, and when the game is started with 2 medals bet, the lower right line L4 is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are taken as valid lines. Further, when the game is started after one medal is bet, only the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, middle line L2, and right-sloping line L5 are not set as valid lines. Below, a game started with three medals bet is called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is called a 2-bet game. Also called a 1-bet game.

FIGS. 9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between symbol combinations that result in winnings and benefits that are awarded in the event of winning.

The small role winnings for which medals are paid out include the 1st small role winning to the 32nd small winning winning.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, The first small role prize. When the first small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 2nd minor prize winning to the 17th minor prize winning, the combination of winning symbols is different, but in a 3-bet game, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M A winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stops on the upper line L1. It is. For example, the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L will stop at the top, the "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M will stop at the middle, and the "Second Replay" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop at the bottom. If it stops, it will be the 5th small role prize. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol (numbers 11 and 14) and the "red bell" symbol are arranged at positions adjacent to the upstream side (numbers 12 and 15). On the right reel 32R, a "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position one symbol away from the "second replay" symbol (numbers 0, 3) upstream (numbers 2, 5). For this reason, when the 5th minor winning is achieved on the downward-sloping line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. When the 18th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The "Red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, and "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the right reel 32R have stopped on the active line. In this case, it will be the 19th small winning prize. When the 19th small winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 20th minor winning combination to the 24th minor winning winning, if the winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, 3 medals will be paid out, and in a 2-bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

Similar to the 18th minor prize winning, the 25th minor prize winning is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower row. In the case of winning the 18th small role, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R may stop in the middle row only if it has been won twice with BB (the "Second Replay" symbol, If the combination of "BAR" symbol and "BAR" symbol) wins the 25th small prize, the "Red 7" symbol or "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop in the middle regardless of whether BB is won or not. It is possible. When the 25th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

If the "Watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 26th small win It will be a prize. When the 26th small winning combination is established, five medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and five medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th small prize will be won if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. This is a winning mode in which the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on the active line, resulting in a so-called watermelon tenpai off-stop roll. When the 27th minor winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "youth" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right If the "red bell" symbol on reel 32R stops on the active line, the 28th small winning combination will be won. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32L has "red bell" symbols (numbers 3, 7, 15, 20) and adjacent positions on the downstream side (numbers 2, 6, 14, 19). ), and a "second replay" symbol is placed at a position adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (number 12) on the downstream side (number 11). On the right reel 32R, there are "Red Bell" symbols (No. 2, 5, 10, 15, 20) and "No. A ``1 Replay'' symbol or a ``2nd Replay'' symbol is arranged. For this reason, when the 28th small prize is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the "bell" symbol appears on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, except when the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row. While the symbol and the "replay" symbol are tenpai, the "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpi off-stop roll. When the 28th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 29th small prize is won. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the No. 9 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top or middle row, if the 29th small prize winning is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the middle line L2. When the 29th small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Received the 30th small role prize. Although the details will be described later, the 30th small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 30th small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 31 small roles won. Although details will be described later, the 31st small winning combination is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game. When the 31st small winning combination is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

If the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "White 7" symbol or "Cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 32nd small It will be a prize. When the 32nd small winning combination is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Prizes for which a replay benefit that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals include the 1st replay win to the 8th replay win. Furthermore, if the second re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and if the third re-gaming winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming win is achieved. If a winning or a fifth re-game winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to 8th re-gaming winning is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only a gaming state transition is performed include a 1st BB winning, a 2nd BB winning, and a CB winning.

If the "Red 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, you will win the 1st BB, and if the "White 7" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line. If the "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Second Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 2nd BB prize will be awarded. . When these BB wins are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Also, if the "Red Bell" symbol or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, , won the CB prize. If a CB win is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop result in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" symbol, "BAR" symbol, "white bell" symbol, and "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In addition, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, and "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. Also when the symbols, "White 7" symbol, "Second Replay" symbol, and "Cherry" symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as a transition roll.

At the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 is provided which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main control device 101, which will be described later. The main controller 101 then recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output LOW detection signals, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 recognizes the switching of the signals and recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reels corresponding to the operated switches to stop rotating.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped. In this case, the right reel 32R stops rotating. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal slot 45 involves an operation in which the player directly inserts medals, it can be said that the medal slot 45 constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back side of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the ejection passage 48 side. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided from a medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 50 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out the medals to the player. The dispensing device 53 discharges the medals into an opening 48a provided in the discharging passage 48 by rotating a medal dispensing rotating plate (not shown), and dispensing the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 via the discharging passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a reserve tank 54 is provided to avoid storing more than a predetermined amount of medals in the storage tank 52. A guide plate 52a is provided inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51 to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored at a level higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. If the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are removed. It is designed to be returned through a discharge port 49.

At the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit input switch 56 is provided for inputting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. Further, a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit input switch 56, and a third credit input switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56. The second credit input switch 57 is for inputting one virtual medal, and the third credit input switch 58 is for inputting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit input switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting game media together with the medal input slot 45. Also, it should be noted that whereas the medal slot 45 involves the player directly inserting medals, the credit input switches 56 to 58 only involve the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

A performance switch 66 is provided between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, which is operated when a performance occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the production switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the production switch 66. There is.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment switch 59 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, if we focus on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, there is a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals that will be paid out before the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constructed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68 is provided to notify the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44. . The press order notification section 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, middle stop switch 43, and right stop switch 44, respectively. Note that the press order notification unit 68 can also be replaced with a liquid crystal display, etc., and an LED lamp may be provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so that the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or .about.44 may be provided with LED lamps adjacent to each of them.

At the top of the front door 12, there is an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that play various sound effects and notify the player of the game status as the game progresses. A speaker device 64 and a liquid crystal display device 65 as an auxiliary display section for providing various information to the players are provided. The liquid crystal display device 65 is used to execute various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be based on the main display section, in this embodiment, It is called a liquid crystal display device 65. On the back side of the liquid crystal display device 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker device 64, a sub-control device 81 for driving the liquid crystal display device 65, and a display control device 201 (not shown, see FIG. 12) are provided.

A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and also includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by a hall manager or the like inserting a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on. Note that the reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 is attached to the housing 11 for overall management of the game.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main controller 101, there is a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has rotated once), and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop switch 42 to 44, inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the input switch 58, a payment detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted and turned on are connected, and signals from these various sensors are outputted to the CPU 102 via an input/output port 104. It has become.

Further, a power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 is equipped with a power supply section 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the state of power interruption and generates a power failure signal not only in the event of a power outage but also in the event of power interruption by the power switch 71. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage, which in this example is 12 volts DC, output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when this drive voltage drops to, for example, less than 10 volts. It is configured so that a power outage signal is output. The power outage signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 executes power outage processing to be described later by recognizing this power outage signal. Further, this power outage signal is also configured to be supplied to the sub-control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for the main controller 101 to perform power outage processing.

On the output side of the main control device 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each reel 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit card The input/output port 104 includes a display section 60, a remaining payout number display section 61, a payout number display section 62, a press order notification section 68, a sub-control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 that can send information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. connected via.

The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106, which is not shown, as is well known, there are various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit, as well as a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing lottery results of winning combinations, and stop information used to control the stop of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing game conditions such as a BB state, a state information storage area 106c for storing game states such as BB state, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power cutoff (including power cutoff due to operation of the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter) when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Yes, when the power outage is resolved (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is turned off by power outage processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed during the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, NMI interrupt processing as power outage flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the sub-control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 82 which is an arithmetic processing means. The CPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 82, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. It has built-in RAM 84 to secure it.

The sub-control device 81 is provided with an input/output port (not shown), and the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are connected to the output side. ing. Then, based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are driven and controlled. In other words, the sub-control device 81 serves as a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main platform that centrally manages games. That is, by providing a sub-board for audio, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The speaker device 64 includes a plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w (first speaker 87a to 23rd speaker 87w). The individual speakers 87a to 87w are installed so that at least one of the installation position and the sound output direction is different from each other. Here, an overview of the configuration in which sound (audio) is output from these plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w will be explained.

The sub-control device 81 is provided with a sound source IC that controls the output of sound, and in this embodiment, the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are provided as the sound source ICs. First amplifiers 86a to 23rd amplifiers 86w and first speakers 87a to 23rd speakers 87w are connected to each sound source IC 85a to 85w, and in this embodiment, 23 channels are provided as sound output channels. There is. When performing a sound effect using sound, the CPU 82 outputs sound data as sound information to be reproduced to each of the sound source ICs 85a to 85w. The sound source ICs 85a to 85w read sound source data corresponding to the sound data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83, and reproduce the sound source data, thereby producing sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w via the corresponding amplifiers 86a to 86w. Output. Processing related to the output of sound data to the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, the reading of sound data by the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, and the output of sound by the individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described in detail later. In the following description, the sound source ICs 85a to 85w are collectively referred to as the sound source IC 85, the amplifiers 86a to 86w are collectively referred to as the amplifier 86, and the individual speakers 87a to 87w are collectively referred to as the individual speaker 87. The speaker device 64 including the sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, and individual speaker 87 constitutes a sound generating means (sound reproducing means).

A production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) is connected to the input side of the sub-control device 81. Furthermore, a first Vol switch 75 and a second Vol switch 76 are connected to the input side of the sub-control device 81 as switches for adjusting the volume of sounds from the individual speakers 87a to 87w. The first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch for the administrator of the game hall, and is provided in a position such as the back of the sub-control device 81 that cannot be operated without opening the front door 12 (Fig. 3 etc. is omitted). On the other hand, the second Vol switch 76 is a volume switch for the player, and is provided at a position that can be operated without opening the front door 12, for example, at a position adjacent to the production switch 66 (Fig. (Illustration by et al. is omitted). Note that the production switch 66 may also serve as the second Vol switch 76. That is, the first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch that cannot be operated by the player but can be operated by the administrator of the game hall, and the second Vol switch 76 is a volume switch that can be operated by the player but can also be operated by the administrator of the game hall. Possible volume switch.

The first Vol switch 75 can set the volume at multiple levels, for example, the volume can be set at 10 levels from set volume 0 to set volume 9. As the value of the set volume increases, the volume increases, and when the set volume 9 is the maximum volume, and the minimum volume is 0, the corresponding sound is not output even if a sound effect is generated.

The second Vol switch 76 can also set the volume in multiple stages, for example, the volume can be set in 10 stages from setting volume 1 to setting 10. Similar to the first Vol switch 75, the larger the value of the set volume, the higher the volume, and the set volume 10 is the maximum volume. On the other hand, unlike the first Vol switch 75, even if the set volume is set to 1, which is the minimum volume, when a sound effect occurs, the corresponding sound is output in a small amount.

For example, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, no sound is output even when the second Vol switch 76 is set to any set volume. Further, when the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 is any value from 1 to 9, the output volume is determined by that value and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. In this case, a range is determined for each of the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75, and by adjusting the set volume of the second Vol switch 76, the range corresponding to the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is set. The volume is determined within the range. Note that the ranges defined for the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75 may be set so that different set volumes overlap with each other, or may be set so that overlapping ranges do not occur. It may be.

Note that the volume from each of the individual speakers 87a to 87w may be individually settable for one or both of the first Vol switch 75 and the second Vol switch 76.

The display control device 201 is provided with a CPU 202, which is an element in which a program ROM 203 and a work RAM 204 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 205, a character ROM 206, and a video RAM 207.

The CPU 202 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control device 81 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 205 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 205).

The program ROM 203 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 202, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information. The work RAM 204 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the CPU 202 executes various programs, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. It is.

The VDP 205 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 65. Since the VDP 205 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip that contains firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 205 adjusts the timing of the CPU 202, the video RAM 207, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 207 from the character ROM 206 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 65.

The character ROM 206 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. This character ROM 206 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

The video RAM 207 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 65 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 207.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be explained. The processing of the CPU 102 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power outage signal sent to the NMI terminal. There is also an NMI interrupt process that is activated in response to the input of . Below, among these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing that is periodically executed by the main controller 101, and the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in normal processing to be described later are saved to the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here, an outline of the power outage process will be explained.

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power failure signal is input, the main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power outage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, by calculating a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power outage is resolved and storing it in a backup area, subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. In addition, considering the case where the power outage flag is erroneously set due to noise or the like, for example, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power outage signal is not output, it means that the power outage has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power outage flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal continues to be output, an infinite loop will continue. Incidentally, even under an infinite loop, it is checked whether or not a power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, the process moves to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are performed.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor, which is the respective drum drive motor. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read results are normal or not. Performs sensor monitoring processing to monitor the In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to transmit various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the sub-control device 81. In step S111, segment data setting processing is performed to set segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, remaining payout number display section 61, and payout number display section 62, respectively. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display sections 60 to 62 and corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. are displayed. In step S113, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are restored to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing is ended.

Next, the normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, pre-start processing is performed to enable the game. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-control device 81 and the like complete initialization. When the initialization of the sub-control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game, etc.) are cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any re-game winnings were achieved in the previous game. If any re-game winning is established, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically input virtual medals of the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is ended. Specifically, when a re-play winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, three virtual medals are automatically inserted, and when a re-play winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Performs processing to automatically insert medals. By the way, in this embodiment, re-play winnings are not established in 2-bet games, but if it is modified so that re-play winnings are established in 2-bet games, 2 coins will be generated in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

In addition, in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without subtracting the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60. In other words, if any re-game winning is achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If any re-gaming winnings have not been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether any abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated or not, and when the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process that pays out the same number of virtual medals as the credited virtual medals. I do.

After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or credit input switches 56 to 58 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Furthermore, if neither medals nor credit input switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After the start waiting process ends, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of bets for medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number of CB states, and gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, normal gaming state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB "1" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the state). In other words, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "2", and in other than the CB state, the condition is that the number of bets is "1" or "3". An affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medals have been bet, or if a bet has been made but the number of bets is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and among the processes, the process after the sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such transition notification processing will be explained in detail later.

After performing the process in step S206, a bet command including information on the process result in step S206 and information on the number of bets for which an affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the sub-control device 81 as a sub-side control device. Set as the output target. The command set here is output to the sub-control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the sub-control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated, the configuration is such that the game can be started if the start lever 41 is operated under a situation where a specified number of medals have been bet. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process is performed in which the combination line corresponding to the bet number is set as the valid line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an active line, and in a 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as active lines. Furthermore, in a 1-bet game, the bending line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a de-energized state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT status process in step S214, and the bonus status process in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S301, a random number to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination is acquired. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random numbers, in step S302, a lottery table is selected for determining the validity of the winning combination. This slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, the current gaming state is determined to be the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is set. select. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which winning probability is based on which internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for the normal gaming state selected in the normal gaming state of "Setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, the determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set. In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current judgment value DV. In addition, in the first judgment value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the current index value IV, 1, and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value, and a new value is set. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is valid or not. In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process advances to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the 1st to 5th minor roles and the 14th to 17th minor roles have been won is set. The winning flag is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

By the way, the set winning flag is a winning flag indicating that the 1st BB was won (hereinafter referred to as "1st BB winning flag") or a winning flag indicating that the 2nd BB was winning (hereinafter referred to as "2nd BB winning flag"). ), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag was set ends (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset with one of the conditions being that the corresponding winning has been achieved. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over multiple games. In addition, in step S306 in a state where the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB has been won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1st BB, 2nd BB, or CB winning flag is set. If a winning combination other than CB has not been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV has failed. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of the validity of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV are added to the judgment value DV used to judge the validity of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, the winning combination is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when determining the validity of the winning combination using the lottery table shown in Figure 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/7.3, which is the probability of winning in the strong cherry. The probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 13) is approximately 1/263, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 14) is approximately 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 15) is approximately 1/154, and the probability of winning chance A (probability of winning when IV = 16) is approximately 1/252. , the probability of winning in chance B (probability of winning when IV=17) is approximately 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no question bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is approximately 1 in 32,800. It is 1. The probability of winning for order push bell 1, order push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) is approximately 1/164, middle push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=24 to 27) is about 1/16.4. The probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is approximately 1/1770, and the probability of winning Strong Cherry Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is approximately 1/1770. Approximately 1 in 4680, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is approximately 1 in 3280, the probability of winning weak cherry duplication 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning is approximately 1/6550. The probability of winning watermelon stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is approximately 1/3280, and the probability of winning watermelon stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 6550. It is 1/1. The probability of winning in Chance A overlap 1, Chance A overlap 2, Chance B overlap 1, and Chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=37 to 40) is approximately 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell duplication 1 and middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV=41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=43, 44) is about 1/65,500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=45) is approximately 1/19.9. Furthermore, the probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Note that in the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 12, 28 to 30, and 46 to 49. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, winnings cannot be won at these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or if it is determined in step S308 that there is no object to be judged, it means that the judgment of the winning combination has ended. In such a case, the process advances to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 are invalidated for a predetermined period.

In the following step S310, lottery result handling processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state or not depending on the lottery results in steps S301 to S309, processing for notifying the winning combination, etc. are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the sub-control device 81 in order to make it understand the result of determining whether the winning combination is correct or not. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the above lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no commands are transmitted to the sub-control device 81. The command is sent to the sub-control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is performed to set stop information for reel stop control, and the lottery process is ended. In the stop information setting process, if a plurality of roles among the small role, replay, and bonus roles have been won, the stop information is set in the priority order shown below. Stop information is set so that when a small role win and a bonus are won, the small role win is established with priority, and so that a bonus win is established when the small role win cannot be established. When winning a re-game and a bonus, stop information is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

Next, the reel control process in step S212 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation performance process is a process for performing a performance using reel control during the invalid period based on the results of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if it has not elapsed, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and motor control initialization processing is performed to set rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

In step S403, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and determines whether an invalid period from the start of rotation has elapsed. If the invalidation period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S403. When the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant and the invalid period has elapsed, a stop command can be issued by lighting the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42 to 44. The player and the like are notified of this fact, and the process proceeds to step S404, where a valid flag setting process is performed. The valid flag setting process is a process for setting the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 to be valid when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. This setting process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the validity flag setting process, it is determined in step S405 whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S406, and it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. do. If a stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S405 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

If a stop command is generated, a stop command corresponding process is executed in step S407. In the stop command response processing, processing is performed to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the reel for which the stop command has been generated. This corresponding processing will be explained in detail later, but in this corresponding processing, the reached symbol that has reached the reference position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated and the stop information storage area 106b are displayed. Based on the stored stop information, the number of slides of the reels to be stopped this time is calculated, and when the symbol corresponding to the calculated number of slides reaches a reference position, the rotation of the reels is stopped. In this case, in this slot machine 10, as a stop mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, a stop mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is. , a stopping mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stopping mode in which it is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stopping mode in which it is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stopping mode in which it is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Five patterns of stopping are prepared, including a stopping pattern in which the reel is stopped after the reel is stopped, and the reel is controlled to stop in one of these stopping patterns.

After that, in step S408, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S409, and the process returns to step S405.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop roll of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, if you win when IV=20 to 27, that is, sequential push bell 1, sequential push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command are activated. A second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established depending on the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. For example, if the middle push bell 1 has been won, the stop information is set so that the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and the middle stop switch 43 Stop information is set so that the first minor prize winning is established when is operated for the first time, and the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly explained. In this slot machine 10, in a gaming state other than the CB state (3-bet game), the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to 4 symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , only the right-sloping line L4 is set as a valid line. Therefore, if the same type of symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol will be activated when it becomes a winning symbol regardless of the timing of operating the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on the line. On the other hand, with regard to the symbols arranged so as to form sections separated by five or more symbols, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in order to stop the symbols on the active line.

An example will be explained in which the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in the order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to achieve the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination.

The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol. Furthermore, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as the fifth minor role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second minor role symbols (fifth minor role symbols) is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped at the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the No. 8 "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the No. 12 "White Bell" The pattern stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second minor prize winning or the fifth minor prize winning to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4.

The second small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is the “Red 7” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Furthermore, the fifth small winning symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols are arranged at the 11th and 14th positions. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor role symbol or the fifth minor role symbol may stop on the active line, or both the second minor role symbol and the fifth minor role symbol may stop on the effective line. It may not stop.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "1st replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small role symbol The barrel "cherry" pattern stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the fifth small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(b), The "Red 7" symbol, which is the second small winning symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination to be realized on the downward-sloping line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding for 4 symbols, the second small role symbol and the fifth small role symbol may not be stopped in the middle row. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the No. 2 "BAR" symbol or the No. 6 "White Bell" symbol stops at the middle row.

When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small role winning can be realized.

The second small role symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Red 7" symbol is placed only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th "Watermelon" symbol to the 18th "Red 7" symbol has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As such, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the second small winning symbol, stops at the lower row. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the number 13 "cherry" symbol has reached the bottom row, the number 14 "watermelon" symbol will move to the bottom row as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

When the fifth minor role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the fifth minor role winning can be realized.

The 5th small role symbol on the right reel 32R is a "second replay" symbol. On the right reel 32R, "second replay" symbols are arranged at positions 0 and 3. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "Second Replay" symbol reaches the lower row, the 5th small role symbol The "Second Replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG. 11.

If the 2nd small role symbol and the 5th minor role symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, if the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the stop information 2nd In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" pattern, "BAR" pattern, and "watermelon" pattern from the left, and the combination of the "white bell" pattern, "white bell" pattern, and "watermelon" pattern from the left are as shown in Figure 11. The result is a transition roll.

In this way, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → middle stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the second minor prize winning will be established, and the fifth minor prize will be won. There will be either a case where the winning is established or a case where the transition number stops.

Next, an example will be explained in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the first small winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols, which are the first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated for the first time, the "red bell" symbol stops at the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are first minor prize symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first minor prize symbols is four or less symbols. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol is stopped on the upper row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, "Red Bell" symbols, which are the first minor winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between "Red Bell" symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated thirdly, the "red bell" symbol stops at the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → left stop switch 42 → right stop switch 44 is operated in the order, the first small winning combination is achieved regardless of the timing of the operation.

If the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small role prize will be established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established, or the transition number will stop on the active line. By the way, if you win the middle bell, you will win the 29th small role regardless of the operation order and timing, and if you win the no question bell, you will win the 29th small role regardless of the operation order and operation timing. 1 small win prize is established.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S408 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S410. The payout determination process is a process that sets the number of medals to be paid out, with one condition being that the winning symbol combinations are lined up on the active line. In the payout determination process, the combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped at the bottom of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been achieved on the active line. judge. If the winning combination is established, it is further determined whether the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality processing is performed to notify the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S411. In the winning result corresponding process, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result corresponding process will be explained in detail later.

After performing the winning result handling process, in step S412, a winning result command is set to cause the sub-control device 81 to grasp the winning winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be explained.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is 0 or not. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been achieved. In such a case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth replay winnings has been achieved. If any replay winnings have not been achieved, the medal payout process is immediately terminated, and if any replay winnings have been achieved, a replay setting process is performed to change the gaming state to the replaying state. , ends the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) explained earlier, when it is determined that the current gaming state is a re-gaming state, automatic insertion processing is performed.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process is ended. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, if the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is It is displayed on the credit display section 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven and the medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. The medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 via the outlet 49. In addition, in the medal payout process, processing is also performed to change the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals. In addition, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the number of payouts is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61 is subtracted. .

Next, the RT state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition number has stopped on the active line. If the transition number has stopped, the process advances to step S502, and it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process ends. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition roll has not stopped on the active line, the process advances to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether it is established. If the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process ends. In addition, if the rolled number stops moving on the active line under a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process returns to step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the lottery table for the normal gaming state (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the probability of winning when IV = 1 The probability of winning is approximately 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/32.8. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if you win when IV=1, it will be a normal replay win, and if you win when IV=2, it will be a first promotion replay 1 win, and IV If you win when IV = 3, you will win 1st promotion replay 2, if you win when IV = 4, you will win 1st promotion replay 3, and if you win when IV = 5, you will win 1st promotion replay 3. In this case, you will win the 1st promotion replay 4. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is approximately 1/7.30. The normal replay winning probability under normal gaming conditions is also approximately 1/7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the normal gaming state, and the winning mode will be such that the replay benefit is granted. changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-gaming prize that does not shift to the gaming state is realized, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-gaming winning, the third re-gaming prize that shifts to the second RT state is realized. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set in order to change the winning mode achieved depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win the first promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, unlike the case where you win the push order bell, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third re-game winning is guaranteed. For 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, the 3rd replay is associated with one of the 6 operation orders, and the 1st replay is associated with the other operation orders. It is attached.

In addition, in the first promoted replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th re-game to 8th re-game are not associated with any of the above six operation orders. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth regames, even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won, no prize is won regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated.

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, the 1st promoted replay 3 is distributed with the 7th replay in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promoted replay 4 is distributed. Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, no matter which of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations for achieving the third replay win. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally achieved. This is because it may be possible to do so. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third re-game winning is established. If the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a winning combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and the probability of winning when IV=1 The probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1/13.2, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is approximately 1/10.5 and IV = 9. , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. That is, when moving to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not shift the gaming state, the second replay win that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth replay win that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth replay win that shifts to the third RT state. A prize is won.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-mentioned first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and Even when winning the 2 promotion replay 2, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. In the case of a win in Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3, the first re-game win or the second re-game win is always achieved regardless of the timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If you win the 2nd promotion replay 1, regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the 1st replay win, the 4th replay win, or the 5th replay win will always be achieved. . If the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

In addition, the number attached to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a random number, "2" corresponds to a symbol combination that results in a unique 7 symbol mid-row stop, and "3" represents a symbol combination that results in a red 7, red 7, and BAR mid-row stop. "4" corresponds to a symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when winning the second promotion replay 1, the winning symbol combination will stop and the fourth replay winning will be established, or the unique 7 The symbol combination that results in the symbol middle stop stops and the fourth re-game winning is established.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-gaming winning has been achieved. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-gaming winning have not been achieved, the process is immediately terminated. If the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when determining the validity of a combination using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to the probability of winning each in the second RT state, and the probability of winning when IV = 9, 10 When IV=11 and 12, the probability of winning is approximately 1/7.00. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small role, replay, and bonus will be won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and the prize winning mode in which the replay benefit is granted. changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state and the 2nd re-gaming winning that moves to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state, and the 6th re-gaming winning that does not change the gaming state. The 7th re-game win, the 8th re-game win, and the 3rd re-game win that moves to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even if a prize is won in BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2, the winning mode that is achieved is changed depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set the stop information accordingly.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. If you win BAR Replay 1, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 7th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true. If you win BAR Replay 2, regardless of the operating timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, you will receive either the 1st replay win, 6th replay win, 8th replay win, or 3rd replay win. always holds true.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process advances to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning combination has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB win is established, a CB setting flag is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter provided in the status information storage area 106c for counting the remaining number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly explained.

If the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, CB It will be a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 or less. Therefore, if a CB is won, the CB is won regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the effective line setting process (step S207), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Set as the valid line.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV = 1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value PV for IV = 46 to 49. is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=46) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium winning combination 2 (IV=47). The probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB Small and Medium Role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1/4.00, The probability of winning the small/medium winning combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=49) is approximately 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and winning modes that are established. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, even if you win any of CB small/medium winnings 1 to CB small/medium winnings 4, any small winning will occur regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, if the 1st minor role is won, the 18th minor role is won, the 19th minor role is won, and the 25th minor role is won, 15 medals are paid out, and the 15th medal is paid out. When winning the 2nd minor role to winning the 17th minor role and winning the 20th minor role to winning the 24th minor role, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when transitioning to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, there is a single bonus (SB) that allows you to play one game (JAC game) as a winning combination, and a single bonus winning (winning). ) may be provided. Further, CB and CB state may be referred to as MB and MB state.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been established, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning has been achieved.

If any BB winning is achieved, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, the remaining payout number counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number display section 61 is caused to display 216. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value have been paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table that is selected in the BB state to which the player transitions at the first BB or the second BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 27 and 31 to 49, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium/small combination 1 (probability of winning when IV=28) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium/red 7 combination combination (IV The probability of winning when IV = 29) is approximately 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BAR matching combination in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is approximately 1/3.00. becomes. The probability of not winning any of the winning combinations is approximately 1/65,500.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As mentioned above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if you win the BB medium and small combination 1, the BB medium red 7 combination combination, and the BB medium BAR combination combination, regardless of the operating order and timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small Any one of winning a winning role, winning a 30th minor role, or winning a 31st minor role is guaranteed. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor role win, the 30th minor role win, and the 31st minor role win are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is approximately 1/65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state shifts to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S613. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout number counter has become 0 or not, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or BB setting flag is performed. Furthermore, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game. Note that the termination determination process will be described in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S613, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game returns to the gaming state when the CB winning was achieved. For example, if a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state is returned to after the CB state ends, and if a CB winning is achieved under the 3rd RT state, the 3rd RT state is returned after the CB state ends. to return to. On the other hand, if the first BB or second BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB winning is achieved under the second RT state, the game will shift to the normal gaming state. Incidentally, in the case of transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. In the case of transition to the BB state, the player can expect an increase in medals by approximately 144 (=9×24−3×24) until the BB state ends.

When none of the 1st BB winning flag, 2nd BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (step S602 is NO), and when none of the 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning, and CB winning flag has been established ( If step S609 is NO), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 or S612, or if the end determination process is performed in step S613, the process proceeds to step S606. Set state command. Here, the status command is a command sent to the sub-control device 81 to grasp the gaming status at the end of the game (that is, the gaming status of the next game), and in step S606, the status information storage area The state command corresponding to the configuration flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. After that, this process ends.

<Overview of gaming state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be explained using FIG. 29. Note that illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the gaming state is the BB state, when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, the BB state ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the transition rolled number stops on the active line, and the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the BB winning is established. The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the normal game state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4, which trigger the transition to the second RT state, and the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won. Therefore, there is no transition from the normal gaming state to the second RT state or third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay win is achieved when you win any of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2, which trigger the transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state will shift to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag will be set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. There is no transition to the third RT state from the first RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-gaming win or the fifth re-gaming winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay win and the fifth replay win are achieved when you win the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (Fig. 23(b) )reference). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB prize is established in a game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transferred number stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is achieved when the player wins BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(c)). The second re-game winning is achieved when one of the falling replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operations (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll will stop on the active line if a missed call occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In addition, if the corresponding BB winning flag is not achieved in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, if the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB winning is achieved in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a carryover lottery table (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In the carryover lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the lottery table for normal gaming state (Fig. 17), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, in the carryover lottery table, bonuses and small winnings that overlap with bonuses are not won.

In this slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: , attack mode, VB mode (including additional specialized zone), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transitions between each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB win or the second BB win is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, a lottery to transition to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. If the lottery to enter the attack mode is won, the game shifts to the attack mode after the BB mode ends, and if the lottery to go to the challenge mode is won, the game shifts to the challenge mode after the BB mode ends. If no one wins in any transition lottery, the mode transitions to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. If the attack mode is changed to the BB mode, the attack mode is returned to after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is changed to the BB mode, the VB mode is returned to after the BB mode ends.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "press order replay") is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery to transition to challenge mode and a lottery to transition to attack mode are performed. If the lottery to enter challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to challenge mode, and if the lottery to enter attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to attack mode. There is no transition to VB mode from normal mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each gaming state of a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so it is rare for the stop switches 42 to 44 to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. This almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode, like the normal mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. In challenge mode, a lottery will be held to switch to attack mode. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, although the challenge mode is not notified of the order of operations like the normal mode, it is set as a mode in which it is easy to transition to the attack mode. If you win the lottery to shift to attack mode, you shift from challenge mode to attack mode. If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, etc.) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is transitioned to the normal mode. Does not shift to VB mode from challenge mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the press order replay is won, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and 3rd RT state, which almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. I will do it. In challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, you can expect that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time you play one game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different probabilities of transitioning to VB mode, and in any attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher than that of normal mode. The transition probability is high. If the lottery to shift to VB mode is won, the mode shifts from attack mode to VB mode. Transition to VB mode If the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, etc.) without winning a lottery, the game shifts from attack mode to normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set to have different probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to VB mode is set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode is the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , the third attack mode, and the fourth attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the player can press the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. 44 corresponds almost to the second RT state. In attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state, you can expect to increase the number of medals by approximately 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the 2nd RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The difference between VB mode and attack mode is that if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 or 2nd promotion replay 2, in attack mode you will be notified of the order of operations to make the 1st replay win. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, and a CB state. However, in VB mode, the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 will be won. If this happens, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is announced. Therefore, the VB mode almost corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In VB mode, if the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, you can expect the medals to increase by about 0.61 each time you play one game, and if the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues for at least 25 games after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

To explain the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is from normal mode to challenge mode, from challenge mode to attack mode, and from attack mode to normal mode. . In attack mode, a lottery to enter VB mode is held, so if a loop occurs in which the player moves from attack mode to VB mode and returns from VB mode to attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of medals he owns. can.

As mentioned above, when comparing the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability of winning the lottery for switching to the attack mode is set to be higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

Furthermore, in the attack mode, a first attack mode to a fourth attack mode are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is different in each attack mode. When shifting from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the second attack mode, you will transition to the second attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the VB mode will increase. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transition to the third attack mode, you will transition to the third attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to VB mode will increase. In the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is held, and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode is held. If you win the lottery for transitioning to the fourth attack mode, you will transition to the fourth attack mode, and the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to VB mode will increase.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the attack mode is promoted from 1st attack mode → 2nd attack mode → 3rd attack mode → 4th attack mode, increasing the probability of transitioning to VB mode and attacking A loop between mode and VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the present slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals he owns in each display mode of attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, the configuration is such that a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state change back and forth depending on the winning of each re-game or the stoppage of a transition roll. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay win is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode or VB mode, when the push order bell is won, the order of operations that will enable the first small winning combination to be achieved is announced, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration regarding the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. Below, they will be explained in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process (1) related to the display mode transition lottery is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

In step S701, the current lottery results are strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chance A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplicate 1, 2, weak cherry duplicate 1, 2, watermelon duplicate 1, 2, chance A duplicate 1 , 2, chance B overlap 1, 2, middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see Figure 17, IV = 13 to 18, 31 to 42, hereinafter these roles are collectively referred to as "specific combinations")? Determine whether or not. If the lottery result is a specific combination, the processing for shifting the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific winning combination has not been won, then in steps S709 to S712, processing for transitioning to the display mode, etc. is performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination has been won, it is determined in step S702 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when the attack mode transition lottery is won, and is cleared when transitioning to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, a first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specific combination processing>
The first specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

Here, the case where the first specific combination processing is performed is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, and the state where the attack mode has not been won. The display mode in this case corresponds to normal mode or challenge mode. In the first specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to challenge mode, and a transition lottery is also conducted to determine whether to transition to attack mode. Further, in the first specific combination processing, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether the current display mode is in challenge mode. The case of not being in challenge mode means that the current display mode is normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for the attack mode lottery in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 as a table for attack mode lottery in step S803. In the normal table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to attack mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Additionally, the probability of transitioning to attack mode is different between the normal table and the chance mode table, with the chance mode table having a higher probability of transitioning to attack mode than the normal table. It is set as follows.

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803, thereby performing a lottery to enter the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to attack mode has been won. If the lottery for entering the attack mode is won, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when a lottery for transitioning to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode is won as a lottery for transitioning to the display mode, the notification that the lottery for transitioning to that transition has been won is sent after passing through the omen mode. It will be done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may be different from the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery, and the game that won the transition lottery and the game that will notify you that you have won the transition lottery may be different. , is set as a precursor mode.

As the number of precursor games, 1 to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. Note that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to vary depending on the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the gaming state. This also applies to other lottery processes for the number of portent games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, processing is performed to input the number of precursor games into the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter becomes 0, it is announced that the omen mode has ended and that the transition lottery has been won.

In step S810, processing for setting the precursor command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is executed. The omen command includes information on the lottery result that triggered the omen mode (the display mode to which the display mode shifts after the omen mode, in the case of step S810, the attack mode) and the number of omen games. Processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process ends.

Further, if the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination processing is ended without setting the number of portent games or the like. The case where the bonus winning flag is set means that you win a specific combination in the carryover state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB and also win the attack mode transition lottery, or you win a combination of combinations with the bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, 2nd prize) and wins the attack mode transition lottery. In this case, priority is given to the BB mode rather than the attack mode as the display mode transition destination.

If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for entering the attack mode has not been won, the process advances to step S811. In step S811, challenge mode lottery processing is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for the challenge mode lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for the lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to challenge mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

Cases in which step S811 is implemented include a case where the display mode is challenge mode, but in this case also, challenge mode lottery processing is executed in step S811, and the lottery table is common for both normal mode and challenge mode. It's a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be different depending on whether or not the challenge mode is in progress.

In step S812, it is determined whether the challenge mode has been won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S814, a process is executed to set a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106.

In the following step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first specific combination processing is directly ended. If not set, in step S816, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed, in step S817, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed, and in step S818, a process for setting a portent command is executed. After that, the first specific combination processing is ended. The processing from step S815 to step S818 corresponds to step S807 to step S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S819 to S823, processing for adding on to the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S820, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition refers to adding the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of consecutive games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of add-on games, a table for the challenge mode add-on game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases depending on the type of specific combination. For example, in Strong Cherry, there is an 80% probability that 30 games will be added to the challenge mode, and there is a 20% probability that 50 games will be added. In addition, for weak cherry, there is an 80% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 20% probability that 20 games will be added.

In step S821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S820 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S822, a process is performed to set the add-on command as an output target to the sub-control device 81, and then the first specific combination process is ended. The top-up command includes information that the top-up has occurred, the number of top-up games, and the target for the top-up (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the sub-control device 81 that has received the additional commands will be explained in detail later, but in the sub-control device 81, based on the reception of the additional commands, the sub-control device 81 performs additional processing as a notification of information included in these additional commands. Perform notifications (additional effects).

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process advances to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination processing is ended. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the condition for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process advances to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery, and is cleared when transitioning to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, a second specific combination process is executed in step S707. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S705 or an affirmative determination is made in step S706, a third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific combination processing>
The second specific combination processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33.

Here, the case where the second specific combination processing is performed is the second RT state and the state where the player has not won the VB mode. The display mode in this case is attack mode. In the second specific combination processing, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the VB mode. In addition, in the second specific combination processing, a lottery for promoting the rank of the attack mode is performed, and a process for increasing the number of consecutive games of the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S901, processing is performed to understand the rank of the attack mode. As already explained, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks, ie, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different for each rank. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to fourth attack mode the current rank of the attack mode is.

In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank determined in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transitioning to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is different overall, and the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. Just as the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the third attack mode than for those in the second attack mode, the probability of transitioning to VB mode is higher for those in the fourth attack mode than those in the third attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

In step S903, a VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to a VB mode win.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process is performed in which a VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed in the same way as steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second specific combination processing is directly ended. If it is not set, in step S907, a lottery process for the number of portent games is executed, in step S908, a process for setting the number of portent games in the portent counter is executed, and in step S909, a process for setting a portent command is executed. After that, the second specific combination processing is ended.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not a VB mode winning, the process advances to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting rank in attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, tables for promotion lottery are acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and counters for lottery are acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. There are multiple tables for the promotion lottery depending on the rank of the attack mode, specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and a table for the third attack mode. There are three (promotion lottery will not be held when staying in the fourth attack mode). At each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set depending on the type of specific combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode, and the table for the third attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the second attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, an attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the rank of the current attack mode to the rank flag one level higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing is performed to set the promotion command as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The sub-control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the display control device 201 and the sound source IC so as to perform an attack mode effect for the rank to which the rank is to be promoted. As a presentation for the attack mode on the liquid crystal display device 65, for example, a presentation of a different background color is set depending on the rank of the attack mode, and in the sub-control device 81, when the promotion command is received, the presentation for the attack mode is set. The display control device 201 is controlled to notify that the rank has been promoted and to perform an attack mode effect with a background color corresponding to the rank to which the rank has been promoted.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the process in step S913 is executed, processes for increasing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode are performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, an additional lottery process for the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this additional lottery process, a table for the attack mode additional lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The attack mode supplementary lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the supplementary lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a strong cherry has an 80% probability of winning the additional lottery, and a weak cherry has a 20% probability of winning the additional lottery. Note that the probability of winning may vary depending on the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the player has not won the additional lottery, the second specific combination processing is immediately terminated.

If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In this lottery process for the number of additional games, a table for the lottery for the number of attack mode additional games is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. The table for drawing the number of additional games in the attack mode is set so that the number of additional games varies depending on the type of specific combination. For example, with strong cherry, there is a 90% probability that 20 games will be added to the attack mode, and there is a 10% probability that 80 games will be added. In addition, in weak cherry, there is a 95% probability that 5 games will be added, and there is a 5% probability that 100 games will be added.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is set in a counter for managing the number of consecutive games in the attack mode (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Performs addition processing. Then, in step S919, a process is performed to set the add-on command as an output target to the sub-control device 81, and then the second specific combination process is ended.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process advances to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode addition flag is a flag used by the CPU 102 to determine that the attack mode addition condition for the number of games is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition will be performed at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific combination processing>
Next, the third specific combination processing executed in step S708 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

The case where the third specific combination processing is performed is the case in the third RT state, or the state in which the player is in the second RT state and has won the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third specific combination processing, processing for adding on the number of consecutive games in attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, an attack mode game number addition lottery process is performed. This process is similar to the process in step S914. Note that the probability of winning the additional lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S1001 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1005, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed, and in step S1006, a process for setting the add-on command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the third specific combination process is ended. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is similar to the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination processing is directly ended. Further, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third specific combination processing is ended. The attack mode additional flag is as described above.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, in step S709, the result of the current lottery process is It is determined whether or not the player has won the order replay or the push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as the "push order winning combination"). If the winning winning combination is determined by pressing the winning combination, the pressing winning combination process is executed in step S710. This push order processing will be explained in detail later.

After executing any one of steps S704, S707, S708, and S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process advances to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether a specialized zone flag corresponding to the additional specialized zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize, and the special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the 7th replay prize. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. The specialized zone flag, specialized zone, and specialized zone processing will be explained in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S711, or after executing the process in step S712, the main lottery result corresponding process is ended.

As mentioned above, in the process corresponding to the lottery result, if it is determined that a specific winning combination has been won, the process will include a lottery to switch to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, and a process to add to the number of consecutive games in challenge mode or attack mode. etc. will be carried out. If you win the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode, after playing the precursor game, you will be notified that you have won the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode. Therefore, the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning the gaming state based on the display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for transitioning the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, there is a process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won, and a notification for transitioning the gaming state. The processing to perform is performed. Therefore, first, a process related to notification of winning the transfer lottery will be explained.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). The mode transition notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the number of precursor games is 0 or not. Counting of the number of portent games is performed in a process corresponding to winning results, which will be described later, and the number of portent games is subtracted by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is immediately ended.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to understand that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the start of the challenge mode using the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. Such notification will be explained in detail later.

After that, in step S1106, counting of the number of challenge mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in response to winning the attack mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81, which has received the attack mode winning notification command, uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode transition lottery has been won. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, this mode transition notification process ends.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode was a precursor mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, a VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in response to winning the VB mode shift lottery. Thereafter, in step S1114, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81, which has received the VB mode winning notification command, uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After executing the process in step S1114, this mode transition notification process ends. Further, if it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the mode transition notification process is directly terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that transition through the omen mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of omen games in the omen mode becomes 0. On the other hand, in the attack mode and VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of portent games in the portent mode becomes 0, only the notification that you have won the attack mode transfer lottery or the VB mode transfer lottery is performed. Even if the number of games reaches 0, attack mode and VB mode will not start. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve a transition to the gaming state, while the attack mode and VB mode involve a transition to the gaming state. Specifically, the attack mode does not involve a transition to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the second RT state is entered when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the third RT state is entered when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won. The process shifts to the case where the player wins, and the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established. Then, the case where the first promoted replay 1 to 4 is won and the third replay prize is established, or the case where the second promoted replay 1 and 2 is won and the fourth and fifth replay prize is established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of these promotion replay wins corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, if you win a lottery to shift to attack mode or VB mode, then in the game in which you win a winning combination that will shift these gaming states, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced. The configuration allows the game state to be changed. Please note that from the time you are notified that you have won the transition lottery for attack mode or VB mode until the attack mode or VB mode starts (until the gaming state changes), you will not be notified as a preparation state (for example, " An announcement will be made that “Preparations are in progress”.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S710) in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to explaining the pressing order processing, an outline of the case where the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be explained with reference to FIG. 36.

<Summary of push order notification performance>
Notification of the operation order at the time of winning the push order combination (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 and the push order notification section 68. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the pressing order combination is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the button corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is added to the middle button (corresponding to the switch 43), and the button is displayed larger than the other button displays. Further, each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, on the liquid crystal display device 65, numbers are displayed on the right button display to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44, and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. The number 2 is displayed and the number 3 is displayed on the left button display.

In the push order notification section 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, and 68c arranged on the left and right corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b lights up, and the left and right LED lamps 68a, 68c light up. goes out. This allows the player to recognize that the first stop switch to be operated in the current game is the middle stop switch 43. Note that the push order notification section 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by lighting different colors of LED lamps. Further, in order to make it possible to recognize the stop switch to be operated from the second time onward, the LED lamps corresponding to the second and subsequent manipulations may be lit in different colors or may be displayed blinking.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, the middle button corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the liquid crystal display 65, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

In the push order notification section 68, the middle LED lamp 68b turns off, and the right LED lamp 68c turns on (the left LED lamp 68a remains off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears, as shown in FIG. Buttons are displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

In the push order notification section 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off, and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the execution timing of the press order notification effect, during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 after the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts and reaches constant speed rotation after the acceleration period, the press order notification effect is executed. The notification effect is set to be executed. In this way, by configuring the press order notification effect to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and then the stop switches 42 to 44 are activated. 44 can be operated as desired, and the game can be played at a good tempo.

<Press order processing>
Next, the push order process executed in step S710 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37.

In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is the case where the first replay or the third replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202, and it is determined whether an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery to enter the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, a process for notifying the push order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). Thereafter, in step S1204, a process is performed to set the press order notification command as an output target to the sub-control device 81, and then the main press order process is ended. The press order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. Processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on reception of the press order notification command will be described in detail later.

Note that the case where the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is performed in step S1203 basically means that the player wins the lottery to enter the attack mode, and the notification of the winning of the attack mode is carried out after passing through the omen mode. It is assumed that this occurs after the attack has occurred, but before the transition to attack mode. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even after transitioning to attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state, and even in such a case, you will not be able to win the 1st promotion replay 1 to 4. By doing so, it is possible to return to the second RT state at an early stage.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is the case where the first replay or the second replay wins a prize depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

In this way, if you win the first promotion replay 1 to 4 in a situation where you have won the lottery to enter the attack mode, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win will be announced, and the gaming state will be changed to the first one. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if you win the first promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay prize is established and cases where the third replay prize is established. There is.

Also, if you win Fall Replay 1 to 3 in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state will shift to the 1st RT state by notifying you of the operation order corresponding to the 1st replay winning. This makes it possible to prevent this from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends and the attack notification flag is cleared and the display mode shifts to normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

For example, in the 1st RT state, you win the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 without winning the attack mode, and the order of operations happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in this case (even if the state shifts to the second RT state), the second replay prize can be established by winning Fall Replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player happens to move to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, the player will immediately move to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is either second promotion replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay will win depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1212, a process for notifying the press order of the fourth regame or the fifth regame is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, fourth re-game, and fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game win or the fifth re-game win is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, a process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and a process for setting a press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win 2nd promotion replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the 1st replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, There will be no press-order notification performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 means that depending on the operation order of the current game, any one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replay will win a prize. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, processing for notification of the push order of the 6th re-game to the 8th re-game is executed. Specifically, among the first re-gaming, third re-gaming, and sixth re-gaming to eighth re-gaming, the operation order corresponding to the sixth re-gaming prize winning to the eighth re-gaming winning is notified (FIG. 23 ( c). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pressing order processing is ended without performing the pressing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the process for notifying the press order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the process for setting the press order notification command is performed in step S1208. The main push order process ends. Therefore, if you win BAR Replay 1 and 2 without winning VB mode, if you are in attack mode, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning will be performed, and if you are not in attack mode, press There will be no announcement performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push order bell win. If the push order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is normal mode or challenge mode. If the mode is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the push order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small winning combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a press order notification command is performed, and then the main press order process is ended. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the main press order process is ended without performing the press order notification process.

<Processing to shift the display mode based on winning results>
<Winning result processing>
Next, as a result of notifying to shift the gaming state as described above, a process will be described in which a winning combination corresponding to the shifting of the gaming state is won (3). This process is performed in the winning result corresponding process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the aforementioned precursor mode, the number of consecutive games in challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted.

In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that the third re-game winning has been established. As described above, when the third replay winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as flags for specifying display modes, in addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to a higher RT state than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialization zone), the attack mode flag is set to the corresponding flag of that mode (VB mode flag, It is configured to coexist with the special zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined that the attack mode flag is set in step S1304 includes not only the case where the attack mode is in progress but also the case where the case is in the VB mode and the case in the specialization zone. .

If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the main prize winning result handling process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the following step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of attack mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of consecutive attack mode games is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1307, the main prize winning result corresponding process is ended.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third re-game winning has not been established, the process advances to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have been established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-gaming wins are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing is performed to shift the gaming state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and the process corresponding to the winning result is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, a process of setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

Thereafter, in step S1312, a VB mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81, which has received the VB mode start command, uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will be started from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1313, the main prize winning result corresponding process ends.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings have not been established, the process advances to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the seventh re-game winning is established as the current stop result. In this embodiment, when the seventh re-game winning is established, that is, a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the left reel 32L, a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and a BAR symbol is stopped in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system moves to the top-up special zone. In the special bonus zone, the number of consecutive games in attack mode is increased not only for specific winning combinations but also for all winnable winning combinations (push order winning combination, specific winning combination, and bonus). Note that the case where the 7th replay win is established is the case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th replay win (Fig. 23 (c)) Furthermore, this is a case where the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replay wins a lottery. The player wins the lottery in which the seventh re-game wins with a probability of 1.

If the seventh re-game winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, in step S1316, processing is performed to set a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, counting of the number of consecutive games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone transitions into the VB mode, and also because the specialized zone always transitions to the VB mode after the specialized zone ends.

Thereafter, in step S1317, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the specialized zone start command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. Then, in step S1318, counting of the number of continued specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games of the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1318, the main winning result corresponding process is ended. Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is directly terminated.

As mentioned above, based on the winning combination (3rd to 5th replay) corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, the processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21). conduct. This is to prevent attack mode etc. from being started based on a winning combination that corresponds to changing the gaming state, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. It is.

Also, when transitioning to a display mode, among those that involve transitioning to a gaming state, transitioning to a higher mode, that is, transitioning from normal mode or challenge mode to attack mode, or transitioning from attack mode to VB mode, Alternatively, when transitioning from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the configuration is such that the transition is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of a transition to a lower mode, for example, when the game state is transitioned due to a second replay winning as a fall replay or a halt of the transition roll, the display mode is not transitioned. When moving to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by winning results (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Number of games management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of consecutive games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of consecutive games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, processing for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be performed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a 3 bet, the number of games management process is ended. That is, in a 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode etc. are not counted.

If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or the bonus state is present. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process of clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as attack mode is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag, VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the attack notification flag and VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus ends, after going through a preparation state such as attack mode, these flags are used to notify the pressing order for shifting the gaming state, making it possible to return to the gaming state before the bonus.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether the number of portent games is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of portent games is subtracted by 1 in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after executing the process in step S1405, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1, thereby subtracting the number of challenge mode continuation games. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether the challenge mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1410. The sub-control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not challenge mode, the process advances to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412, where the attack mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby subtracting the number of games in which the attack mode can be continued. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether the attack mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. Thereafter, in step S1416, an attack mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the mode is not attack mode, the process advances to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the mode is VB mode, the process advances to step S1418, and it is determined whether the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the special add-on zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby subtracting the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the number of games management process is ended. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. Thereafter, in step S1423, a VB mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be explained in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the number of games management process ends.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the area is in the special add-on zone, the process advances to step S1424. In step S1424, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone is subtracted by subtracting 1 from the specialized zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and a specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1427. Upon receiving the specialized zone end command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the specialized zone will end in the current game. Such notification may include, for example, notification of the number of games in which the game has been successfully added in total in the current specialized zone. After performing the process of step S1427, the number of games management process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the number of games management process is directly ended.

<Completion judgment process>
Next, as the process when the bonus ends, the end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether the bonus termination conditions are met or not, and if the bonus is to be terminated, processing is performed to notify the winner of the attack mode, etc. where the bonus has been won in duplicate, and the attack mode in which the bonus has been won in duplicate. Perform processing to add on the number of games, etc.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been achieved. As already explained, the first small winning combination (BB medium small winning combination 1) is achieved with high probability during the bonus (FIG. 28). In addition, when winning in the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV=29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th minor winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and further, If the 30th minor role of the 1st minor role and the 30th minor role wins a lottery, the 30th minor role is won. In the present embodiment, for example, when winning the BB, middle, and red 7 combination combination, the probability of winning the 30th minor combination is 1/100 in the lottery. When winning in the BB medium BAR winning combination (IV=30), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small winning combination (FIG. 27(b)), and then the 1st small winning If the 31st minor role of the winning combination and the 31st minor role wins a lottery, the 31st minor role winning is established. In this embodiment, for example, when winning the BB medium BAR winning combination, the probability of winning the 31st small winning combination is 1/200.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a small winning combination has been achieved, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the remaining number of payouts is performed in step S1502. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process in step S1502, additional processing is executed in step S1503. The add-on process is a process for granting benefits other than payout of game media based on the result of the game during the current bonus. For example, if the current game result is the 30th small winning combination (lower row of 7 red), if the display mode before the bonus shift is normal mode or challenge mode, the attack mode will be won, and the normal mode or If the mode is other than the challenge mode, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode will be increased (for example, 100 games). In addition, if the 31st small prize winning (lower BAR complete) is achieved, if the display mode before transition to the bonus is normal mode or challenge mode, it will be won in attack mode and VB mode, and if it is attack mode, it will be won in VB mode. and specialization zone, and if in VB mode, the specialization zone will be won multiple times (for example, twice), and if it is in the specialization zone, the number of consecutive games in attack mode will be increased (for example, 300 games). . In step S1503, a flag corresponding to the transition of the display mode (attack mode winning flag, etc.) is set, and a counter addition process (addition process of an attack mode continuation counter, etc.) according to the number of additional games is performed.

In the following step S1504, it is determined whether the remaining number of payouts has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is immediately ended. If it is 0, the bonus end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1505, and then in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, etc. Performs processing for adding on the number of consecutive games.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, a lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507, the number of portent games is set in step S1508, and a portent command is set in step S1509. The processing in steps S1507 to S1509 is similar to the processing in steps S808 to S810. After executing the process in step S1509, the end determination process ends.

That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has won the attack mode, after the bonus ends, a precursor game is played, and then the attack mode winner is notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the situation will change to an advantageous state again after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won during the portent mode before any winning notification, the number of portent games has already been set when the lottery process for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of portent games is reset. In other words, regardless of the number of remaining games at the time of winning the bonus, after the bonus ends, the number of precursor games of 1 out of 1 to 32 games is set again. By doing this, it is possible to make the player feel excited for a long time after the bonus ends.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is ended. That is, if the bonus ends in a situation where the player has also won the challenge mode or the VB mode, after the bonus ends, the winner of the challenge mode or the VB mode is notified through a precursor game.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process advances to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed in step S1513, a process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed in step S1514, and an additional command is set in step S1515. . The processing in steps S1513 to S1515 is similar to the processing in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process in step S1515, the end determination process ends.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, a challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, a challenge mode add-on game number process is performed in step S1518, and an add-on command is set in step S1519. . The processing in steps S1517 to S1519 is similar to the processing in steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after executing the process in step S1519, the end determination process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S712 in the lottery result corresponding process (FIG. 31). As already explained, the player enters the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games of attack mode is added to each game.

That is, in the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is similar to the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of games to be selected is greater in the number of additional games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number of additional games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing regarding notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processing performed by the sub control device 81 will be described as (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. As a process for various notifications, an effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the effect setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 84 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 84 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer in which a plurality of commands can be stored individually and can be read from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after executing the process in step S1702, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on a bet operation, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, the mode transition notification process (Fig. 35), the challenge mode start command, the attack mode winning notification command, the VB mode winning notification command, etc. If these are the bet time commands, a bet time performance setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after executing the process in step S1704, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, as well as the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third specific combination processing (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order processing (FIG. 37), and the like. If it is one of these start time commands, start time effect setting processing is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after executing the process in step S1706, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and is a command output from step S407 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a command that is set in the stop command response process. If it is such a command at each stop operation, a performance setting process at each stop operation is executed in step S1708.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after executing the process in step S1708, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main control device 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and is a command that is output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result response process (Figure 38) There are zone termination commands, etc. If it is one of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after executing the process in step S1710, other processes are executed in step S1711. In step S1711, effects are set based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), and connections are made without going through the main controller 101. Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), settings for effects, settings for error notification, etc. are performed.

After performing various effects setting processing in steps S1701 to S1711, effect data setting processing is performed in step S1712, and then the present effect setting process is ended. The production data setting process includes data for display production (production command) and sound production so that the production set by the sub-control device 81 is performed as a display production by the display control device 201 and a sound production by the sound source IC 85. This is the process of setting data (sound data) for

Below, the effect setting process at the time of bet, the effect setting process at start, the effect setting process at each stop operation, and the effect setting process at all stops will be explained. Note that each effect setting process will be explained with reference to the schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. 54 to 59. The production data setting process will be explained after each production setting process, but in the following explanation, the display production that is performed when the display production data and the sound production data are set based on each production setting process. Also, an overview of the sound production will be explained.

<Bet performance setting process>
The bet time performance setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43.

In step S1801, it is determined whether the currently received bet command includes a challenge mode start command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the words "Challenge mode start" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the display mode to be transitioned to is likely to win the attack mode transition lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating that it is a chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Get the attack mode!" in a deep male voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the currently received bet command includes an attack mode winning notification command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1804. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the words "Attack mode confirmed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification performance, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched female voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the currently received bet time command includes a VB mode winning notification command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, processing for setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S1806. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the words "VICTORY BONUS confirmed" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification performance, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

After executing any of the processes in step S1802, step S1804, and step S1806, or if a negative determination is made in step S1805, in step S1807, other bet effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is performed. end. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to the receipt of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 for the corresponding number of bets are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. For example, a process for returning from the demo mode where one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined period of time, and a lamp around the start lever 41 is lit to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing, etc.

<Start production setting process>
Next, the start effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44.

In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, and the display mode is set in the corresponding display mode. , settings are made so that the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 84b of the RAM 84 on the sub-control device 81 side, a challenge mode flag, attack mode flag, VB mode flag, and specialized zone flag are set as flags for understanding the display mode. Areas are provided, and a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and a corresponding flag is cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by understanding these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

Here, in the display mode setting process, if the display effect corresponding to the display mode has already been set, the display effect for the same display mode is not set again. In other words, at the start of a game where the display mode has been shifted, the display effect corresponding to the new destination display mode is set, while if no display mode shift has occurred, the display effect of the previous game is set. Continue. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the increase in processing load caused by the display mode setting process being performed at the start of every game, and also to avoid the increase in processing load caused by the display mode setting process being performed at the start of each game. This difference from the fact that the display effect of the previous game is continued due to no transition, makes it easier to recognize that the display mode has transitioned. Moreover, it is also possible to associate joy or disappointment due to the change in display mode based on such a difference.

In the following step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push winning combination. If the pressing order winning combination is determined, a pressing order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the press order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the start command currently received includes a press order notification command. If the press order notification command is not included, the main press order notification process is ended. If a press order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S2003, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the third replay winning is established, and then the press order End the notification process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replay 1 to 4 has not been won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is a fall replay 1 to 3. If it is a fall replay 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2005, and the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the first replay winning is established, and then the press order notification is performed. Finish the process.

If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not a fall replay 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is a second promotion replay 1 or 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the VB winning notification has been set is set in the various flag storage area 84b of the RAM 84. The notification completed flag is cleared based on transition to VB mode. Then, in step S2007, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notification completed flag. If the winning of the VB mode has been announced, in step S2008, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, and then, The press order notification process ends. If the winning of the VB mode has not been announced, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery result is the BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, the mode correspondence flag is checked in step S2010 to determine whether the current display mode is VB mode. If the VB mode is in effect, in step S2011, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled to notify the press order that the 6th to 8th replay winnings are achieved, and then the press order notification is performed. Finish the process. If the VB mode is not in progress, the process advances to step S2005, where the press order notification for the first re-game winning is performed, and then the press order notification process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled to notify the pressing order that the bell winning is established as the first minor role, and then the pressing order notification process is performed. end. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the press order notification process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start performance setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that the winning combination has not been won, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the specific winning combination has been won. If the specific winning combination is won, specific winning notification processing is performed in step S1905. The specific winning combination notification process will be explained in detail later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after executing the process in step S1903 or step S1905, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the add-on command has been received, in step S1907, processing is performed to set the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed as "+10" on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the additional production, a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound "Kyukyukyukyuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu is the speaker device 64.

Here, the additional effect setting process in step S1907 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46.

In step S2101, processing is performed to determine the number of add-on games based on the add-on command received this time. In the following step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of randomly selecting at which timing in the game the additional effect will be performed, assuming that the additional effect will be performed in the current game.

The execution timing of the additional effects is set to differ depending on the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, as the execution timing of the additional effects in this game, the first reel, second reel, and third reel are set in the order of stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, the times when the first reel is stopped, the second reel is stopped, and the third reel is stopped are set. Then, among the stop operations for each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation was performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 were pressed, and the timing at which the stop OFF operation was performed when the pressing operation was completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 are movable from an initial position located on the front side to an operating position located on the rear side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by being operated from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are Switches to HI signal. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal.

Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward the initial position by springs or the like. Therefore, if you release your hands from the stop switches 42 to 44 and do not apply the operating force (pressing force) that pushed them toward the operating position, the stop switches 42 to 44 will be moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. to return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Then, the main controller 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which indicates that the pressing operations of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been completed, based on the detection signal switching from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

The additional effect is set so that it can occur when each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated as a stop ON operation or when a stop OFF operation is performed. That is, in a game where an additional effect occurs, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table for the top-up effect, when the number of top-up games is relatively small, for example, when a top-up occurs for 5 to 10 games, the timing when the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 50%. , the timing of the first reel's stop OFF operation is 5%, the second reel's stop ON operation is 20%, the second reel's stop OFF operation is 5%, the third reel's stop ON operation is 10%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is selected at 10%. In this case, each reel is more likely to be selected when the reel is stopped ON than when it is stopped OFF.

On the other hand, if the number of games with a relatively large number of add-on games is 100 or more games, the timing when the first reel stop ON operation is selected is 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. The timing at which was performed is 20%, the second reel stop ON operation is 10%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 35%, the third reel stop ON operation is 10%, the third reel stop OFF operation ( (when all reels are stopped) is 20%, and each is selected. In this case, each reel is more easily selected when the reel is operated to stop and turn OFF than when it is operated when the reel is turned ON.

In other words, in this embodiment, the additional effect is more likely to occur for a large number of games when the additional effect occurs when the stop OFF operation is performed for each reel than when the additional effect occurs when the stop ON operation is performed for each reel. It is set. Also, when comparing the first to third reels, the game with the highest number of stop operations (ON operation, OFF operation) on the second reel is likely to be selected, and the game with the second largest number of stop operations on the third reel is likely to be selected. It is set so that the number of games that is the smallest when the first reel is stopped is easily selected.

In this way, since the number of additional games to be notified differs depending on the stop order, expectations for the additional effects can be varied for each stop operation. For example, during a stop operation where a large number of additional effects are likely to occur, it is possible to make people expect that effect to occur.Specifically, when the second reel is stopped, especially when the second reel is stopped OFF, It can be expected at times. In this case, for example, as a player who expects an additional effect when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF, the player should calm down and hope that an additional effect will occur before the second reel is stopped and turned OFF. At the same time, it is considered that the second reel is stopped and turned off.

In other words, if there is a possibility that a notification that will be advantageous to the player if a predetermined operation is performed, the player will temporarily stop playing before performing the predetermined operation due to the expectation of the notification. However, after making time to save money and enjoying the time to the fullest, there are cases where the predetermined operation is performed. This is because by doing so, the user can enjoy the information to the fullest rather than receiving the information that would be advantageous without preparing mentally. In this regard, as mentioned above, by increasing the anticipation when the second reel is stopped OFF, time is created before the second reel is stopped OFF, that is, when the second reel is stopped ON. It becomes easier. In this way, in relation to the timing of notification of the benefits to be obtained, it becomes easier to save time during the stop operation.

Returning to the explanation of the setting process of the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether the lottery result in step S2102 was when any of the reels were stopped ON. judge. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2104, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to set any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 84b. These flags are flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the timing at which the additional effect occurs. In addition, in step S2104, processing is performed to read performance data of an additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the performance data storage area, and temporarily store the data in a predetermined performance data setting area. conduct. When the CPU 82 grasps that the additional performance will occur at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 82 reads out the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area and causes the additional performance to be performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is being operated to stop or turn OFF. If it is during the stop OFF operation of these reels, in step S2106, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped OFF. Specifically, processing is performed to set either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage areas 84b. These flags are also flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the timing of the occurrence of additional effects. Also, in step S2106, processing is performed in which the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is read from the performance data storage area and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined performance data setting area.

If a negative determination is made in step S2105, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed in which a third reel stop OFF operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b. Further, in step S2107, temporary storage processing of performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the additional effect setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the start effect setting process, if the additional command is not received in step S1906, or after executing the process in step S1907, the bonus notification process is executed in step S1908, and the bonus notification process is executed in step S1909. The continuous effect setting process is executed, and then, in step S1910, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is ended. The bonus notification process and the continuous performance setting process will be explained in detail later. In the process of step S1910, for example, in response to the start of the game, an effect suggesting the lottery result is set, a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted, etc.

<Production setting processing for each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting process for each stop operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned on is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If it has been set, it is determined in step S2203 whether the stop ON operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the effect during the set stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is directly ended. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2204, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that an effect is performed at the time of the stop ON operation, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop ON operation, as shown in FIG. 49(a), the liquid crystal display 65 An additional performance will occur. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker device 64.

In addition, for example, if this game is a press order winning combination and a press order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel will stop based on each stop ON operation, and the press order notification effect will become the next operation target. The effect changes to show the reel. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation, a display is displayed indicating that the first reel is the operation target as shown in FIG. 36(a). . When the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) is shown as shown in FIG. 36(b). It changes into a performance. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the performance when the stop ON operation is performed, a display showing that the second reel is to be stopped is displayed as shown in FIG. 36(b), and the second reel is rotated by the stop ON operation. Based on the reel stopping, the display changes to indicate that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 36(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205, and it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main controller 101 when pressing the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations for each reel is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as an effect for the current game. If it has not been set, this setting process ends. If set, in step S2207, it is determined whether the stop OFF operation command received this time is for a reel stop operation that is the target of the set effect during the stop OFF operation. If the operation is not to stop or turn off the target reel, this setting process is immediately terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2208, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that an effect is performed at the time of the stop OFF operation, and then this setting process is ended.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the current stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the effect setting process for each stop operation is directly terminated.

<Processing for setting effects when fully stopped>
Next, the full stop effect setting process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes a challenge mode end command. If a challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the display control device 201, sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that a challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the words "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "Be more diligent!" in a deep male voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the words "Attack Mode!! Ver. 1" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the attack mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched female voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. In other words, this is a display indicating that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the words "Attack Mode!! Ver. 2" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 as a promotion effect. Also, when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 3rd attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 3" is displayed, and when the rank of attack mode is promoted to the 4th attack mode, the text "Attack mode!! Ver. 4" is displayed. Display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the currently received stop command includes an attack mode end command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. ), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in the current attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you again" in a high-pitched female voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode start command. If a VB mode start command is included, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2308. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the characters "777 VICTORY!!" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory Bonus Start" in male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a VB mode end command. If a VB mode end command is included, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2312. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the words "VICTORY BONUS END" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the number of consecutive games of attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. Displays the number of consecutive games (including VB mode and specialized zone), and also displays the total number of coins paid out in attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "It's still going on" in male and female voices).

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone start command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the words "Additional challenge!!" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and a special mode in which addition of attack mode is likely to occur is displayed. Displays a character that suggests that In addition, in the specialized zone start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a specialized zone end command. If a specialized zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing is performed to set a specialized zone end effect. In the specialized zone end effect, for example, the total number of games added in the current specialized zone is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. In addition, in the specialized zone end effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "Kyukyukyukyeen!") is emitted from the speaker device 64. Note that it is preferable to vary the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker device 64 depending on the total number of additional games.

If the specialized zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the currently received stop command includes a bonus end command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the total number of coins paid out during the current bonus is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and if the bonus is in attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, attack mode ( Displays the total number of coins paid out (including VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end performance, a performance using characters etc. that suggests these contents is performed depending on whether the attack mode is successful or not, the challenge mode is successful or not, and the number of additional games.

After executing any of the processes in step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2315, proceed to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the display control device 201 and the sound source IC 85 are controlled to execute the additional effect if the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 46), if the current generation timing of the additional effect is set to full stop, all reels 32L, 32M, as shown in FIG. 49(c), , 32R is stopped, an additional effect is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. Further, in this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is emitted from the speaker device 64.

Thereafter, in steps S2310 and S2320, other stop effects are set, and then the main effect setting process is ended. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the sound source IC 85 controls the upper lamp 63 to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or controls the sound source IC 85 so that the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination. and controls the sound source IC 85 so that the speaker device 64 emits sound effects corresponding to automatic bets during replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the sub-control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. In addition, on the sub-control device 81 side, in addition to notifying the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In this embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. A continuous performance is a performance that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and is performed multiple times (four times in this embodiment). This is a performance that can be continued for a long period of time, and is a performance that informs whether or not there was an advantageous result in the final game. The mid-bonus performance is a performance performed in each game during the bonus state that is transitioned based on the first BB or second BB winning.

An outline of the continuous performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 59.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), at the start of the first game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of consecutive effects is displayed (in the figure, four stages correspond to the continuous effects of four games). (Shows a nodaruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect was set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect of the successful Daruma Drop in the first stage, (This indicates that the continuous performance continues). If the continuous performance is interrupted, at the end of the first game for which the continuous performance was set, a performance will be performed to notify that the continuous performance will end midway (for example, a performance in which the first Daruma drop fails, etc.) ). The presentation regarding whether or not to continue the continuous presentation is the same for each game in the continuous presentation.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are three remaining Daruma doll effects). Then, at the end of the second game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue (the figure shows the performance indicating that the second stage Daruma Drop has been successful, and it indicates that the continuous performance will continue). ).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects have been set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, there are two remaining daruma doll drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, a performance is performed to notify whether or not the continuous performance will continue. ).

As shown in FIG. 59(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous performance, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous performance is performed (in the figure, a one-stage Daruma drop performance). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed to show whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows an effect indicating that the Daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous performance, the performance of the next game is set by taking over the performance of the previous game, and the performance of each game has continuity. Furthermore, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous performance (how many games there are until the end of the continuous performance).

Here, in each game of continuous performance, whether or not the continuous performance continues until the next game is set such that the more the game of continuous performance progresses, the higher the continuation rate becomes. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous performance, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous performance will be notified, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be notified. Therefore, in a continuous production, the level of interest of the players varies greatly depending on the number of games in the continuous production that the current game is, and the interest increases as the game progresses from the starting game to the ending game. .

The setting of the continuous performance is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908), and the continuous performance setting process (step S1909) in the start performance setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be explained in order below.

<Bonus notification processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether the game to be started is a bonus winning game based on the lottery result command received this time. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2402, a notification game lottery process for notifying the bonus winning is executed. In this notification game lottery process, the number of games after which the bonus winning will be announced is determined by lottery. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (to be notified in the current game) to 10 games. In addition, in the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination that triggered the winning (whether or not it was a duplicate win, and if it was a duplicate win, the type of the overlapping small win, etc.). For example, if a bonus is won by duplicating strong cherries, a smaller number of games is likely to be selected, and if a bonus is won by duplicating weak cherries, a larger number of games may be selected.

In the following step S2403, a process is performed to set the number of consecutive performance games based on the notification game determined in the process of step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, a continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 84c. The continuous performance counter is a counter for keeping track of the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration that performs a continuous performance of four games, the continuous performance is started in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 4, and the result notification is performed in a game where the continuous performance counter becomes 0. More specifically, for example, if it is determined in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4. If it is determined in step S2402 to notify the bonus winning after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous performance starts from the game where the continuous performance counter is 4.

Note that if less than four notification games are set in step S2402, the continuous performance is started from the middle. For example, if it is determined in step S2402 that the bonus winning will be announced after two games, 2 is input to the continuous performance counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous performance starts from the current game, and is performed from the performance of the third continuous performance game shown in FIG. 59(c).

After executing the process of step S2403, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b in step S2404. The continuous performance flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that a continuous performance is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process in step S2404, the process advances to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether a bonus game is to be started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the next game in which the first BB or second BB is won until the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 is the case where the first BB or the second BB winning is achieved in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 84c in the RAM 84. The bonus performance counter is a counter for executing a performance set for each game as the bonus game progresses, and a performance according to the counter is performed on the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like.

As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, the winning combination is won in which 9 medals are paid out every game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the first BB and second BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the above-mentioned bonus effect counter is a counter for determining which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. It is. In step S2406, the bonus effect counter is set to 24 as the number of bonus effect games, and the bonus effect counter is subtracted for each bonus game. After performing the process of step S2406, a bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 84b in step S2407. The mid-bonus performance flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the mid-bonus performance is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or after executing the process in step S2407, this bonus notification process ends.

<Processing for notification of specific winnings>
Next, the specific winning combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2502 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If the bonus command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If you have not won a bonus, that is, if you have won a specific role as a lottery result, but you have not won a lottery to transition to challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or an additional lottery for the number of consecutive games, If the player has not won the bonus either, a lottery process in the pseudo omen mode is executed in step S2504. Pseudo omen mode is visually difficult to distinguish from omen mode, but in omen mode, the player is notified of an advantageous result (such as winning a challenge mode) based on the completion of the number of omen games. The pseudo-harbinger mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo-harbinger games.

In step S2504, a table for pseudo omen mode lottery is acquired from various table storage areas of the ROM 83, and a counter for lottery is acquired from various counter areas 84c, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the pseudo omen mode. . The table for the pseudo omen mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo omen mode lottery differs depending on the type of specific winning combination. For example, a strong cherry is more likely to win a pseudo omen mode lottery than a weak cherry. It is set so that the probability of winning the omen mode lottery is high.

In step S2505, it is determined based on the processing result in step S2504 whether or not the lottery in the pseudo omen mode has been won. If the player has won, in step S2506, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo omen mode is performed. This processing corresponds to step S808 and the like on the main control device 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games of 1 from 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In the following step S2507, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 is set in a continuous performance counter. In this embodiment, when the omen mode or pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or pseudo omen mode ends after continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursor games into the continuous performance counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of the continuous performance (4 games remaining), the continuous performance is started. It happens.

In step S2508, a process is executed to set a pseudo flag indicating that the mode is a pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 84b. In the following step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the specific winning combination notification process ends. Further, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific winning combination notification process is immediately terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous performance setting process performed in step S1909 of the start time performance setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53.

In step S2601, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command currently received. If an omen command is included, in step S2602, processing is performed to input the number of omen games in the omen mode included in the omen command into a continuous performance counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the portent mode becomes one corresponding to the start of continuous performance (4 games remaining), continuous performance will be started. In the following step S2603, a continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after executing the process in step S2603, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous performance flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous performance counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether the continuous performance counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to continuous performance. If the continuous performance counter is a number corresponding to continuous performance, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not a pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608, and the performance data table for the main omen is acquired from the performance data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2609, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the performance data table for the main sign and the continuous performance counter, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance data table for this precursor, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, it is the performance data that indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, and the continuous performance is If the counter is 0, the performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends successfully.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process advances to step S2610. In step S2610, a performance data table for a pseudo omen is acquired from the performance data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2611, the performance data of the corresponding continuous performance is specified from the performance data table for pseudo precursors and the continuous performance counter, and processing is performed to set it as the current continuous performance. As for the performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance data table for pseudo precursors, if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data indicates that the continuous performance will continue until the next game, or the performance data indicates that the continuous performance will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, this performance data indicates that the current continuous performance ends in failure.

Note that when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3, the performance data specified from the pseudo-harbinger performance table includes data for which no continuous performance is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, no continuous effect effect data is set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect will continue until the next game as shown in FIG. 59(a). When the performance data for the first game is set and the continuous performance counter is 0, the performance data for the second continuous performance game is set, which indicates that the continuous performance will not continue until the next game in FIG. 59(b). By doing so, it becomes possible to set a performance in which the continuous performance is interrupted in the middle in a game in which the number of pseudo-precursor games in the pseudo-precursor mode is 0.

After performing the processing in step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous performance counter is 0, processing to clear the continuous performance flag and pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. Note that if the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. If a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the process in step S2613, this continuous effect setting process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous effect flag is not set, the process advances to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, in step S2615, the subtraction process of the bonus performance counter is performed. Specifically, processing is performed to subtract 1 from the bonus performance counter. In the following step S2616, a bonus effect data table is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a. Then, in step S2617, performance data for the corresponding mid-bonus performance is identified from the bonus performance data table and the mid-bonus performance counter, and processing is performed to set it as the current mid-bonus performance. In step S2618, it is determined whether the bonus performance counter is 0 or not. If the bonus mid-performance counter is 0, processing to clear the bonus mid-performance flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the main continuous performance setting process is ended.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the lottery process is performed on the main controller 101 side based on the insertion of medals as game media and the starting operation of the start lever 41, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are Rotation is started, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. In the configuration in which benefits are given, a plurality of RT states are provided with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process, and the RT state shifts when a prize is established in the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay. Whether or not the corresponding replay will win a prize is determined by the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the lottery, and the notification of the order of operations is made by changing the display mode according to the result of the lottery process. This is done by winning a lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to establish the push order bell prize and win a medal. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a gaming state where the replay probability is improved, and also to the display mode where the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to establish a first-order prize and win a large amount of medals.

<Production data setting process>
Next, the effect data setting process in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 60. The effect data setting process causes the effect set in each process from step S1701 to step S1710 to be performed as a display effect on the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65), and also as a sound effect on the sound source IC 85. This is a process to ensure that the process is performed.

That is, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the effects have been set in each process of steps S1701 to S1710. More specifically, the effect setting process at the time of bet in step S1704, the effect setting process at the start of step S1706, the effect setting process at each stop operation in step S1708, the effect setting process at all stops in step S1710, and the other processes in step S1711. It is determined whether any one of the various performance setting processes has been performed. If any effect setting process is performed, display data setting process is executed in step S2702. The display data setting process is a process for causing the display control device 201 to perform display effects. In the following step S2703, sound data setting processing is executed. The sound data setting process is a process for causing the sound source IC 85 to perform sound production.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after executing the process in step S2703, the effect data setting process is ended.

The display data setting process and the sound data setting process will be explained below.

<Display data setting process>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, in the display data setting process, first in step S2801, the effect set in each process of steps S1701 to S1710 is ascertained, and address information corresponding to the grasped effect is specified. Execute processing. Specifically, the performance data table is acquired from the performance data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83, and the address information of the performance command corresponding to the currently set performance is specified.

As shown in FIG. 62, the performance data table includes a performance number (performance content), a performance command to the display control device 201, and command address information indicating the storage location of the performance command in a one-to-one correspondence. They are stored in association with each other. Therefore, by specifying the address information of the effect data table based on the currently set effect contents, the effect command to be output to the display control device 201 is specified.

For example, in the bet time effect setting process, if a challenge mode start effect (step S1802) is set, in step S2801, the effect number of the challenge mode start effect is grasped from the effect data table, and the effect corresponding to the effect number is determined. Specify the command address information to be used. If a continuous performance is set in the start performance setting process, in step S2801, the performance number of the continuous performance corresponding to the value of the current continuous performance counter is grasped from the performance data table, and the continuous performance corresponding to the current performance number is determined. Specify the command address information to be used. Furthermore, if the effect for the display mode has been set by performing the display mode setting process in the start effect setting process, in step S2801, the effect number of the current display mode effect is determined from the effect data table. Then, the command address information corresponding to the performance number is specified.

In the following step S2802, processing for obtaining a production command is executed based on the address information specified in step S2801. Specifically, based on the command address information specified in step S2801, a process is executed to acquire a performance command from the corresponding address in the performance command storage area 83d of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2803, the production command is output to the display control device 201, and then the present display data setting process is ended.

That is, the display data setting process is executed at the timing when various effects are set as one process of the periodic process (effect setting process) that is started periodically (2 msec) by the sub-control device 81, and the display data setting process is executed at the timing when various effects are set. The effect commands set in the process are also output to the display control device 201 at the timing when various effects are set in the periodic process.

<V interrupt processing of display control device 201>
Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the CPU 202 in the display control device 201 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 63. The V interrupt process is a process executed when the CPU 202 detects a V interrupt signal. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 205 to the CPU 202. Note that when the VDP 205 outputs an image signal for one frame to the liquid crystal display device 65, it starts outputting the image signal from a dot in the upper left corner of the display screen, and lines up the image signal on a horizontal line that includes the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the dots, and image signals are output for each horizontal line sequentially from the top to the left to right dots. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot at the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the VDP 205 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 202 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, thereby making the CPU 202 recognize that the update of one frame of the image is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 1/30 sec (approximately 33.3 msec). In this respect, the V interrupt processing can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

Here, in addition to the V interrupt process, the CPU 202 executes a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, and a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sub-control device 81. A detailed explanation of these main processing and command interruption processing will be omitted, but the effect command output from the sub-control device 81 is stored in the command storage area by the command interruption processing.

In the V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 62, first in step S2901 it is determined whether a new command has been received. Specifically, in the display data setting process, a production command is output from the sub-control device 81 by outputting a production command, and whether or not the production command is stored in the command storage area by command interrupt processing. Determine whether If a production command is stored, data table selection processing is executed in step S2902. A data table is a group of information that defines the processing required to display one frame of image at each update timing when displaying a video corresponding to a received command on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65. be.

By the way, the output of the production command on the sub-control device 81 side is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, whereas the V interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of about 33.3 msec, and multiple outputs occur during one V interrupt processing cycle. Direction commands may be output. In this case, in steps S2901 and S2902, determination of the presence or absence of commands and data table selection processing are performed for all commands stored in the command storage area.

As shown in FIG. 62, the data table is set with a group of image data that corresponds to the production command set on the sub-control device 81 side. For example, if the production command C1 corresponding to production number 1 is received, the number of frames is p (p is a natural number), and Da(1) to Da(p) are used as the data used. The data table that will be displayed is selected. In addition, when the production command Cx corresponding to the production number x (x is a natural number) is received, the number of frames is s (s is a natural number), and the data to be used is Dx (1) to Dx. The data table in which (s) is used is selected.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or after executing the process in step S2902, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. This allows the CPU 202 to understand the processing necessary to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing.

In the following step S2904, task processing is executed. In task processing, in order to display one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing, it is necessary to understand the type of image data necessary to instruct the VDP 205 to draw, and to determine the parameters to be applied to the identified image data. Perform calculations.

Thereafter, after executing the drawing list output process in step S2905, the present V interrupt process ends. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame worth of images corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is to be drawn in the video RAM 207, and information on the parameters updated in the task process is also set. The VDP 205 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 206 according to this drawing list, and sets the read image data in the frame buffer of the video RAM 207 with the above parameters applied. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, an image signal is outputted to the liquid crystal display device 65 according to the created drawing data, so that one frame worth of image is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65.

For example, in FIG. 62, the data table corresponding to the production number 2 is selected, and the data of Db(q-5) is used as the F(q-5)th frame image for display. In this case, by performing the pointer update process in step S2903, the number of the used data is updated to advance by one frame. Then, through task processing in step S2904, the data of Db(q-4) is grasped, and parameters to be applied to the grasped data are calculated. Thereafter, by the drawing list output process in step S2905, a drawing list for data of Db(q-4) is created and sent to the VDP 205. As a result, the F(q-4)th frame image is displayed on the display screen.

As described above, each time the V interrupt process is activated in the display control device 201 at a cycle of approximately 33.3 msec, the image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65 is updated by one frame. That is, the display effect set as the display data setting process in the effect data setting process of the sub-control device 81 is updated at a cycle of about 33.3 msec in the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65).

<Sound data setting process>
Next, the sound data setting process executed in step S2703 in the effect data setting process (FIG. 60) of the sub-control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 64. The sound data setting process is a process for performing a sound effect in accordance with the display effect set in the immediately previous display data setting process.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the speaker device 64 for producing sound includes a plurality of sound source ICs 85, amplifiers 86, and individual speakers 87, and each sound source IC 85 has a corresponding amplifier 86 and an individual speaker 87. to control sound generation and output. The sound data setting process is a process for instructing the sound source IC 85 to output sound data in the current sound performance. After the sound data setting process instructs the sound source IC 85 to provide sound data, the sound source IC 85 generates and outputs sound based on the designated data.

The sound generation process in which the sound source IC 85 generates sound and updates the output will be described in detail later, but the sound source IC 85 performs the sound generation process at a cycle shorter than the update cycle for one frame in the display control device 201. The configuration is such that it is performed at a certain period of 10 msec. In this case, the update cycle for one frame on the display control device 201 side and the update cycle on the sound source IC 85 side are indivisible cycles, and the timing of the generation of sound effects and the update timing of display effects is Discrepancies may occur.

More specifically, for example, when starting a predetermined sound production in the second frame of a predetermined frame of production, if the start timing of the predetermined sound production is the update timing of the sound source IC 85, the above-mentioned After about 33.3 msec, which is the update timing of the second frame, there will be a difference of about 3.3 msec (about 33.3 msec - 10 msec x 3) from the update timing of the sound source IC 85. In addition, when trying to start a predetermined sound production in the third frame of the predetermined frames of production, if the start timing of the predetermined sound production is the update timing of the sound source IC 85, the third frame After approximately 66.6 msec, which is the update timing of will occur.

In other words, in the case of a configuration in which the sound production is set using update data for each sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, even if it is attempted to match the start timing of the sound production with the update timing of the frame, a deviation will occur. In this case, for example, a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may occur slightly later than the frame update timing, or a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may occur slightly earlier than the frame update timing. I will do it. Such a discrepancy may ruin the production effect.

In particular, as described above, this embodiment is a game in which the aim is to win a large amount of medals by changing the display mode as well as changing the game state, and there is a great deal of interest in the display effects performed on the liquid crystal display device 65. It can be said that this is being received. In this respect, the content of the display effect is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect (for example, whether or not there is a winning lottery for transitioning to attack mode is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect). If the system is configured such that the display mode will change or not, not only will it not be possible to fully expect the effect of the key parts of the game, such as whether or not the display mode will change, but also the performance of the key parts will be ruined. Interest in the gameplay in this embodiment will be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the sound data setting process according to the present embodiment, measures are taken to prevent a discrepancy between the display effects and the sound effects.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the sound data setting process, first in step S3001, a process is executed to understand the content of the current performance. More specifically, as the content of the current performance, a process is executed to specify the performance number specified in step S2801 of the display data setting process. In the following step S3002, processing is performed to grasp the value of the sound source counter K stored in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84. The sound source counter K is a counter for specifying the type of sound source IC 85 to which sound data is set in the current process. The value of the sound source counter K corresponds to the number of the sound source IC 85, and in the processes after step S3003, sound data setting processing is performed for the sound source IC 85 corresponding to the sound source counter K grasped in step S3002.

That is, in step S3003, based on the production number specified in step S3001, the sound production data table stored in the production data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83 is read out, and the sound production data table is read out in the sound source IC 85 in the current process. - Performs processing to specify a frame on the display control device 201 side (hereinafter referred to as a sound data generation frame) to start outputting.

As shown in FIG. 65, the sound production data table stores each sound source IC 85 and sound data generation frame in association with each other for each production number. For example, in the performance with the performance number 1, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w. Therefore, in the performance with the performance number 1, at the start timing of the display performance, all the sound source ICs 85 start generating and outputting sound, and all the sound source ICs 85 start the sound performance. In addition, in the performance with the performance number 2, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC85a to third sound source IC85c, while for the fourth sound source IC85d to 23rd sound source IC85w, The voice data generation frame is not set. Therefore, in the production with the production number 2, the sound production is started at the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c at the start timing of the display production, and for the other sound source ICs 85d to 85w, no sound is produced in any frame. There is no performance. In other words, although the first and second presentations differ in the type and number of sound source ICs 85 used, the start timing of the sound presentation is the same as the start timing of the display presentation.

On the other hand, in the performance with the performance number 3, for example, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c, and the sound data generation frame is set as the second frame for the fourth sound source IC 85d. For the fifth sound source IC 85e, the sound data generation frame is set as the third frame. In addition, for the sixth sound source IC 85f, the sound data generation frame is set as the x-th frame, and for the 21st sound source IC 85v, the sound data generation frame is set as the y-th frame. Therefore, in the production with the production number 3, the sound production by the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is started at the start timing of the display production, and the sound production by the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is started at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the second frame). The sound production by the fourth sound source IC 85d is started, and the sound production by the fifth sound source IC 85e is started at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the third frame). Further, the sound production by the sixth sound source IC 85f is started at the update timing to the x-th frame, and the sound production by the 21st sound source IC 85v is started at the update timing to the y-th frame. That is, in the third performance, the start timing of the display performance and the start timing of the sound performance may be different.

In step S3003, for example, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, it is determined that the sound data generation frame is 1 for the first sound source IC 85a. Further, for example, if the current performance number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, it is determined that the sound data generation frame is 2 for the fourth sound source IC 85d.

After determining the sound data generation frame in step S3003, a process of determining the sound data address after the sound data generation frame is performed in step S3004. In the sound production data table, a sound data number corresponding to the content of the sound production to be performed after the sound data generation frame is stored for each sound source IC 85. For example, in the first production, for the first sound source IC 85a, a sound production is performed based on the sound data of number a, followed by a sound production based on the sound data of number a+1, followed by number a+2, number a+3, etc. The sound data numbers are stored as follows. Further, for the second sound source IC 85b, a sound effect is performed based on sound data number b, and sound data numbers are successively stored such as number b+1, number b+2, number b+3, and so on.

The sound production corresponding to each sound data number has a length of a predetermined period (for example, about 11.1 msec), and when the sound production is performed by the first sound source IC 85a in the first production, the predetermined period is After the sound production of number a is performed for a period of time, the sound production of number a+1 is performed for a predetermined period of time, the sound performance of number a+2 is performed for a predetermined period, and then the sound performance of number a+3 is performed for a predetermined period of time. Continuous sound generation and output is performed according to the set sound data number, such as when a performance is performed.

The sound data number is for linking with the address information of the sound source data stored in the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. The sound source data is data that each sound source IC 85 reproduces in a sound generation process to generate and output sound, and is data for reproducing music, voice, sound effects, and the like. As shown in FIG. 66(a), a sound data table is stored in the sound data table storage area 83b of the ROM 83, and the sound data table includes a pair of sound data number and address information of sound source data. 1 and are stored in correspondence. Based on the sound source data address information, each sound source IC 85 acquires the corresponding sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e shown in FIG. This can be done via That is, as described above, the sound data numbers are set consecutively, and the sound source data is set in association with the sound data numbers, and the sound source IC 85 continuously acquires the sound source data for reproduction. The configuration is such that the sound source data is played back (sound generation/output) in the acquired order.

Here, volume information is also stored in the sound source data storage area 83e along with the sound source data. That is, the sound source data storage area 83e stores a set of output frequencies and the like (pitch, tone type, etc.) as sound source data and output volume as volume information. Values from 1 to 139 are set for the volume information, and the larger the value, the larger the output volume. Each sound source IC 85 can also obtain volume information when acquiring sound source data based on the sound source data address information, and performs sound production at the corresponding volume.

In step S3004, based on the sound production data table, the sound data numbers after the sound data generation frame are acquired, and based on the acquired sound data numbers, a process is performed to grasp the sound source data address information from the sound data table. .

For example, in step S3004, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, then for the first sound source IC 85a, number c, number c, number c, number a, number a, etc. As sound source data address information corresponding to , information such as A(c), A(c), A(c), A(a), A(a), . . . is grasped. Also, if the current performance number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, for the fourth sound source IC 85d, the sound sources corresponding to number d, number d, number d, number d, number d, etc. As data address information, information such as A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), etc. is grasped.

In the subsequent step S3005, processing is performed to determine the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame. For example, for the first and second effects, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in each sound source IC 85 is 0. On the other hand, for the third performance, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is 0, but the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fourth sound source IC 85d is 0. 1, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fifth sound source IC 85e is 2, and the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the sixth sound source IC 85f is x-1.

In the following step S3006, it is determined whether the number of frames grasped in step S3005 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 150 frames, 5 seconds). If the number is less than the predetermined number, the process advances to step S3007.

In step S3007, processing is performed to ascertain silent data addresses for the number of frames ascertained in step S3005. As shown in FIG. 66(a), address information (B(x), B(y)) of silent data is set in the sound data table as the sound data address with the sound data number x or y. has been done. Silent data is data whose output frequency is below the identification lower limit value (20 Hz) or above the identification upper limit value (20 kHz) (20 kHz in this embodiment) as sound source data, and whose volume information is set to 0. It is. The corresponding playback lengths of the x-th silent data and the y-th silent data are different, and the playback length of the x-th silent data is set as the length of one frame (approximately 33.3 msec). . On the other hand, the playback length of the y-th silent data is variable, and the length is set in a later process (step S3011).

Here, when the sound source IC 85 performs sound production by reproducing sound source data whose volume information is 1 or more, if the sound source data has an output frequency set to be equal to or higher than the identification lower limit value and lower than the identification upper limit value, the player can understand the sound. On the other hand, even if sound source data whose volume information is 0 or whose output frequency is below the identification lower limit or above the identification upper limit is played, the player cannot grasp the sound. Can not.

In other words, in this embodiment, it is possible to set sound data for playing sound source data that outputs sounds that the player can understand, and also outputs sounds that the player cannot or is difficult to understand. It is possible to set the sound data for which the sound source data to be played is played. The sound data (sound data) in which the sound source data is reproduced that outputs a sound that can be understood by the player corresponds to normal information as sound information in this embodiment, and is not or difficult to understand by the player. Sound data (silent data) in which sound source data from which sound is output is reproduced corresponds to special information as sound information in this embodiment.

In step S3007, a process is performed to grasp the address information of the sound data number x and the sound data address information B(x) as silent data corresponding to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame. Specifically, for example, if the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is 1, B(x) for one frame is grasped as sound data address information. Further, when the number of frames is 3, B(x), B(x), and B(x) for 3 frames are grasped as sound data address information.

Note that in order to distinguish between sound data address information corresponding to silent data and sound data address information corresponding to sound data different from silent data, the former is referred to as a silent data address, and the latter is also referred to as a sound data address. .

In the following step S3008, the silent data address obtained in step S3007 and the sound data address obtained in step S3004 are set in the area corresponding to the current sound source counter K in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. Perform processing. That is, in the data output area 84a, the first area to the 23rd area are set corresponding to the number of sound source ICs 85, and each sound source IC 85 stores sound source data based on the data address set in the corresponding area. Sound source data and volume information are acquired from area 83e.

For example, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, two frames of B(x) and B(x) are known as silent data addresses, and the sound data Addresses A(e), A(e), A(e), . . . are known. In this case, in step S3008, B(x), B(x), A(e), A(e), A(e) are displayed in the fourth area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a. , , etc. are set. Furthermore, if the current performance number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 22, the silent data address is not known, and the sound data addresses are A(b), A(b), A( b) , , are understood. In this case, in step S3008, information such as A(b), A(b), A(b), etc. is set in the 22nd area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a.

If it is determined in step S3006 that the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process advances to step S3009. In step S3009, processing is performed to identify the update timing (processing timing) of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame. For example, when the sound data generation frame is the 182nd frame, the length of the period until it is updated to the sound data generation frame is 181 frames x approximately 33.3 msec = approximately 6.0333 seconds. In this case, considering the update cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85, the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame is 6.030 seconds.

In step S3010, a process is performed to specify the length (about 3.3 msec in the above example) from the update timing of the sound source IC 85 specified in step S3009 to the start timing of the sound data generation frame. Then, in step S3011, processing is performed to grasp the silent data address corresponding to the length specified in step S3010. That is, the silent data address B(y) corresponding to the y-th silent data whose length can be set is determined by the length specified in step S3010 (approximately 3.3 msec).

In the subsequent step S3012, information on the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame identified in step S3010 (start timing information), the silent data address grasped in step S3011, and the silent data address grasped in step S3004 are obtained. Processing is performed to set the sound data address in the area corresponding to the current sound source counter K in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84.

After executing the process in step S3008 or step S3012, the process advances to step S3013. In step S3013, a process of adding 1 to the sound source counter K is performed. Then, in step S3014, it is determined whether the sound source counter K has reached the upper limit value of 24 or not. 24, in step S3015, the value of the sound source counter K is reset to the initial value of 1, and then the sound data setting process is ended. As a result, the next sound data setting process will start with the sound data setting process corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a. Further, if the number is less than 24 in step S3014, it means that there is still an unset sound source IC 85, and in this case, the process returns to step S3002 and repeats the process of setting the sound data of the corresponding sound source IC 85. .

Through the sound data setting process as described above, the address information of the sound data corresponding to the current performance is set in each area of the data output area 84a. Here, an example of address information set in each area will be explained with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 shows a case where the effect number is number 3.

For example, the first area corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a includes A(c), A(c), A(c), A(a), A(a), A(a), A(b), Address information such as A(b), A(b), . . . is stored. All of these address information are sound data addresses, and the first sound source IC 85a starts the sound performance based on the sound data address from the start timing of the performance, that is, from the display start timing of the first frame in the display performance. conduct.

On the other hand, the fourth area corresponding to the fourth sound source IC 85d includes B(x), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), Address information such as , , etc. is stored. As already explained, B(x) is a silent data address with a length of one frame. Therefore, although the fourth sound source IC 85d generates sound from the start timing of the performance, the sound for one frame from the start timing is generated based on silent data, and the sound generated by such sound generation is Unable to understand or difficult to understand. Therefore, although the fourth sound source IC 85d starts generating sound from the display start timing of the first frame in the display performance, the player perceives it as if the sound production had started from the display start timing of the second frame. be done.

Similarly, address information such as B(x), B(x), A(e), A(e), A(e), etc. is stored in the fifth area corresponding to the fifth sound source IC 85e. . Therefore, although the fifth sound source IC 85e starts generating sound from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player does not perceive it as if the sound effect starts from the display start timing of the third frame. Ru.

In the sixth area corresponding to the sixth sound source IC 85f, address information such as B(y), A(c), A(c) and A(c) as well as sound generation start timing information are stored. The sound source IC 85 starts generating sound from this start timing. Moreover, as already explained, B(y) is a silent data address corresponding to the length of the start timing of the sound data generation frame and the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before that. Therefore, although the sixth sound source IC 85f starts generating sound at a timing slightly earlier than the display start timing of the x-th frame in the display effect, the player does not know that the sound effect starts from the display start timing of the x-th frame. It is grasped as if it were something.

<Sound generation processing by sound source IC 85>
Next, the sound generation process executed by the sound source IC 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. Note that the sound generation process is a process that is individually executed by the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w, and is based on new data being set in the data output area 84a by the sub-control device 81. It is activated and then executed at a predetermined period (10 msec period). In other words, the sound generation process is a process that is started periodically, and the start of the cycle is the execution of the sound data setting process by the sub-control device 81. Note that if a new sound data setting process is performed after the periodic sound generation process has been started based on the sound data setting process, the update cycle of the sound generation process will be reset. Ru. That is, when a new production opportunity arises, the sound generation process is started at a new cycle. The activation cycle of the sound generation process by the sound source IC 85 is longer than the activation cycle (2 msec cycle) of the effect setting process by the sub-control device 81, and is longer than the activation cycle (2 msec cycle) of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201. .3 msec period).

Here, the sound source IC 85 can access the RAM 84 in the sub-control device 81, and more specifically, can access the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. Therefore, when sound data setting processing is performed in the sub-control device 81 and various data are set in the data output area 84a, such data is not output to the sound source IC 85 by a command etc., but is set in that area. The state is maintained. In other words, the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 can exchange data via the data output area 84a, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Furthermore, the sound source IC 85 can also access the ROM 83 of the sub-control device 81, and more specifically, can access the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. Therefore, when the sound source IC 85 performs sound production, there is no need to output sound source data (and volume information) to the sound source IC 85 by commands, etc., and the sound source IC 85 stores the sound source data (and volume information). No need arises. This makes it possible to dramatically simplify the processing configuration for processing sound information, and also to simplify the configuration of the sound source IC 85 itself.

In step S3101, it is determined whether start timing information is set in the data output area 84a. If the start timing information has been set, it is determined in step S3102 whether the start timing of the current sound generation process corresponds to the start timing information. If it is not the start timing, the sound generation process is ended. If the start timing information is not set in step S3101, or if it is determined in step S3102 that it is the start timing, the process advances to step S3103.

In step S3103, processing is performed to grasp the sound data address set in the data output area 84a. In the following step S3104, processing for acquiring sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address. In the following step S3105, a process of acquiring volume information from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address.

After determining the sound source data and volume information for the current performance set in the sound data setting process in steps S3104 and S3105, a process for determining the set volume information is executed in step S3106. The process in step S3106 is a process for determining the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 connected to the sub-control device 81.

Incidentally, when the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, for example, if the corresponding counter values in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 are changed, the sound source IC 85 A configuration may also be adopted in which the counter value of the area 84c can be grasped and the counter value is grasped in step S3106. Furthermore, when the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, the configuration may be such that the values are output to the sound source IC 85. Further, the Vol switches 75 and 76 may be connected directly or indirectly to the sound source IC 85.

Thereafter, in step S3107, sound generation control via the amplifier 86 and speaker 87 is performed based on the sound source data acquired in step S3104 and the sound output amount ascertained in steps S3105 and S3106. After executing the process in step S3107, the sound generation process ends.

Here, the difference between the sound source data when 0 is set as the volume information and the sound source data when 1 to 139 is set as the volume information will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 69(a) shows the relationship between the sound source data and the setting value of each Vol switch when 0 is set as the volume information, and FIG. 69(b) shows the relationship between the values of 1 to 139 as the volume information. It shows the relationship between the sound source data and the setting values of each Vol switch when a is set.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first Vol switch 75 is mainly used for the administrator of the game hall, and the second Vol switch 76 is mainly used for the players. It is also possible to set the volume. For the first Vol switch 75, the volume can be set in 10 stages from 0 to 9, and for the second Vol switch 76, the volume can be set in 10 stages from 1 to 10. No matter which volume switch 75 or 76 is used to set the volume, the larger the setting value is, the louder the sound will be output.

When the volume information is set as 0 as the sound data, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the sound generation process is performed regardless of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. However, the player cannot understand such sounds. In other words, for sound source data whose volume information is set as 0, a sound that cannot be understood by the player is output regardless of the volume settings of both Vol switches 75 and 76. In other words, no sound is output.

When the volume information is set as a as the sound source data, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the setting value of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the setting value of the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76 are added. The sound at the selected volume (in the figure, the value obtained by integrating both setting values and the output volume value of the sound data is shown) is output. However, if the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, a sound that the player cannot understand is output regardless of the volume information or the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. In other words, no sound is output.

The volume setting of 0 of the first Vol switch 75 is used by a game hall manager or the like to adjust the game machine. The reason why the first Vol switch 75 is provided with a volume setting of 0, while the second Vol switch 76 is not provided with a volume setting of 0, is due to fraudulent activities that intentionally do not generate sound effects ( For example, this is to make it difficult for the game hall manager to detect an error sound or to prevent him or her from detecting an illegal bonus win.

<Relationship between sound production and display production>
Next, the relationship between the frame update timing in the display effect, the update timing of the sound effect, and the length of sound data will be explained with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 70.

When a performance opportunity occurs and display data (performance command) and sound data are set in the performance data setting process in the sub-control device 81 at the timing t1, the display control device 201 starts the frame from the timing t1. The update of the sound generation process is started in the sound source IC 85 from the timing of t1.

As already explained, the frame update cycle is 1/30 sec, which is about 33.3 msec. On the other hand, the update cycle of the sound generation process is 10 msec. The frame update period and the sound generation process update period are not divisible by natural numbers. Therefore, if updates of the frame and the sound generation process are started at the same time at timing t1, the update cycle of the frame and the update cycle of the sound generation process hardly match. For example, at timing t3, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, there is a difference of about 3.3 msec from the timing t2, which is the update timing of the fourth sound generation process. Furthermore, at the timing t5, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, there is a difference of about 6.6 msec from the timing t4, which is the update timing of the seventh sound generation process, and the eighth sound generation process There is a difference of about 3.4 msec from the update timing of t6. Therefore, even if you try to generate sound in the sound generation process so that the sound production starts at the frame update timing, the sound production may start earlier or later by the difference in the update cycle. Put it away.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such a discrepancy, the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed before the update timing of the frame (sound data generation frame) that starts the sound production. There is. Specifically, for example, the third sound source IC 85c in FIG. 70(e) starts sound production at timing t3, which is the update timing to the second frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, the silent data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed from timing t1, which is a timing before the timing t3. Set as a set. Further, the fourth sound source IC 85d in FIG. 70(f) starts sound production from timing t5, which is the update timing to the third frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, the silent data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silent data is performed from the timing t1, which is the timing before the timing t5. Set as a set. By doing this, it is not necessary to perform sound generation processing so that the sound production is started at the timing t3 in the third sound source IC 85c and the timing t5 in the fourth sound source IC 85d. At the timing of , it is sufficient to simply continue playing the sound data that has started before that time. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a discrepancy between the display performance and the sound performance.

The silence data set for the third sound source IC 85c is playback data with a length of one frame from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and the silence data set for the fourth sound source IC 85d is the reproduction data from the timing t1 to the timing t3. The reproduction data has a length of two frames up to the timing of . In this way, by configuring the silent data to be set in units of frames (natural number times the length of the frame), the processing configuration for setting silent data can be simplified. .

In the relationship between the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d to which silence data is set, and the first sound source IC 85a and second sound source IC 85b (FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d)) to which silence data is not set, there is no sound. Regardless of whether data is set or not, each of the sound source ICs 85a to 85d starts playing sound data (generating sound by sound generation processing) from the start timing of the first frame. In other words, each of the sound source ICs 85a to 85d does not need to monitor the reproduction start timing of the sound, making it possible to avoid an increase in the processing load on each of the sound source ICs 85a to 85d.

Also, when comparing the amount of sound data of the first sound source IC 85a that does not set silent data, and the third sound source IC 85c and fourth sound source IC 85d that set silent data, both of them are equal to the length (x) from t1 to t10. The sound data is for a frame), and the amount of data does not vary among the sound source ICs 85a, 85c, and 85d, and processing can be equalized.

On the other hand, for the second sound source IC 85b that performs sound production from the start of the first frame to the end of the second frame, only sound data for two frames is set, and sound data from the third frame onward is not set. In other words, like the third sound source IC85c and the fourth sound source IC85d, when there is a period in which no sound production is performed, and when the sound production is performed after that period, the sound production is silent in order to adjust the start timing of the sound production. Although the data is set, even if there is a period in which no sound production is performed, as in the case of the second sound source IC 85b, if the sound production is not performed after that period, the start timing of the sound production is adjusted. Do not set silent data as it is not necessary. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary data settings and reduce the amount of setting data.

In the relationship between the second sound source IC 85b and the fourth sound source IC 85d, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound production by sound generation processing based on sound data over the first frame and the second frame, and the fourth sound source IC 85d For these first and second frames, sound production is not performed by sound generation processing based on silent data, while sound production is performed from the third frame to the x-th frame by sound generation processing based on sound data. . In other words, from the first frame to the second frame, sound production is performed by the second sound source IC 85b, from the third frame to the xth frame, the sound production is performed by the fourth sound source IC 85d, and the second sound source IC 85b A series of sound effects from the first frame to the x-th frame are performed by the IC 85d. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a series of sound productions are performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, even if sound productions of the same length are performed, the configuration is realized by a single sound source IC 85 (for example, the first sound source IC 85a). Compared to the above, the sound output location and output direction are different, making the sound production more profound.Moreover, in order to create such a configuration, the switching timing of the sound source IC 85 (in the above example, the frame It is possible to prevent sound interruptions and duplications from occurring at the update timing), and it is possible to suitably realize the series of sound effects.

The fifth sound source IC 85e to seventh sound source IC 85g in FIGS. 70(g) to 70(i) show patterns in which a series of sound effects as described above are realized by a plurality of sound source ICs 85. For example, the fifth sound source IC 85e executes sound generation processing based on the first frame's worth of sound data as the first period, and the sixth sound source IC 85f executes sound generation processing based on the first frame's worth of silent data as the first period. The second period is for executing sound generation processing based on the second frame of sound data. That is, a series of sound effects spanning the first frame (fifth sound source IC 85e) and second frame (sixth sound source IC 85f) are realized by the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f. Furthermore, the seventh sound source IC 85g executes sound generation processing based on the silent data of the first frame as the first period and the second frame as the second period, and Sound generation processing is executed based on three frames of sound data. That is, in addition to the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f, the seventh sound source IC 85g generates the first frame (the fifth sound source IC 85e), the second frame (the sixth sound source IC 85f), and the third frame (the seventh sound source IC 85g). A series of sound effects will be realized. In this way, by using silent data in a configuration in which sound is generated and output by multiple sound source ICs 85, a series of sound productions in which the sound output locations and directions are different can be created without interruption or overlap of sound. This can be achieved without causing any problems.

In the embodiment described above, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, no sound data is set from the timing t1, as in the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. 70(j). In this case, the update timing (t8) of the sound generation process immediately before the start timing (t9) of the relevant sound data generation frame is specified, and the update timing (t8) of the sound generation process (start timing information) is determined. Silent data (silent data from t8 to t9) for the length from to the start timing of the sound data generation frame (frame (Sound data) is set. In this way, if sound generation processing based on silence data can be performed over an excessively long period, instead of setting silence data for the entire period, set the silence data to the minimum necessary. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of configuration data.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Display effects and sound effects are set in the effect data setting process in the sub-control device 81, and based on the settings, display effects are performed in the display control device 201, and sound effects are performed in the sound source IC 85. In this configuration, the update timing of the display effect on the display control device 201 side and the update timing of the sound effect on the sound source IC 85 side are different, and these update periods are not divisible by each other. In such a configuration, the update timings of the two do not easily synchronize, and even if an attempt is made to start the sound production at the update timing of the display production, for example, there will be a lag between the two productions due to the lag with the update timing of the sound production side. I end up. Therefore, in the above configuration, the silent data is set before the update timing of the display effect, and the sound data is set from the update timing of the display effect, and the sound based on the silent data is set at the update timing of the sound effect. The configuration is such that playback starts. By doing this, it is possible to start the sound performance based on the sound data at the update timing of the display performance, even though there is a difference between the update timings of both performances.

When setting silent data, we ascertained the sound data generation frame on the display performance side, and depending on the results of this understanding, we varied the amount of silent data to be set and the setting method. More specifically, when the number of sound data generation frames is less than a predetermined number of frames, as in the case of the first sound source IC 85a to the seventh sound source IC 85g in FIG. 70, silent data is set from the start frame (first frame), As with the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. 70, if the number of frames is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, silent data is set from the update timing of the sound production immediately before the sound data generation frame. In other words, if you try to set too long silence data, the amount of data to set will increase, and even though the amount of data is small, if you also have to set the start timing information, the processing load may increase. . By doing this, it becomes possible to maintain a balance between the amount of silent data to be set and the processing load.

When setting silent data from the start frame, it is now possible to set the silent data in units of frame length. By doing this, there is no need for special processing to match the length of the silent data with the frame update cycle, and it is possible to avoid discrepancies with the display effect with a simple configuration.

It has a plurality of sound source ICs 85, and in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set respectively, while each sound source IC 85 is configured to be able to individually execute sound generation processing. By doing so, after the sound data setting process is performed on the sub-control device 81 side, the execution of the sound production can be entrusted to each sound source IC 85, and the sub-control device 81 side can perform the generation of new production. This makes it possible to perform other processing in preparation for the future.

In each production, the plurality of sound source ICs 85 are set so that the sound data generation frames can be different. The sub-control device 81 is configured to set silent data for each of the sound data generation frames. By doing so, it becomes possible to produce the effect of superimposed sound production by the plurality of sound source ICs 85 using a simple sound deviation prevention mechanism using silent data.

In a configuration in which sound generation processing is performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, one sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on sound data at a predetermined timing, and the other sound source ICs 85 perform sound generation processing based on silent data at the same predetermined timing. The sound data of each sound source IC 85 can be set so that the generation process can be performed. By doing so, it is possible to realize continuous sound production while making the sounds from each sound source IC 85 overlap with each other.

Sound data, including silent data, is configured to be set in a data output area 84a of the RAM 84, and each sound source IC 85 can access the data output area 84a. By doing this, there is no need to output commands when the sub-control device 81 issues sound production commands to each sound source IC 85, which simplifies the processing configuration when exchanging information. It is possible to suppress information omissions.

Furthermore, address information of sound source data is set in the data output area 84a as sound data, and the sound source IC 85 is configured to acquire sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83 based on the address information. . As a result, raw data for reproduction (sound source data) is not set in the data output area 84a, so the amount of information to be set can be significantly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting sound effects.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, silent data is set before the sound data as the sound data to be subjected to the sound generation process, but in this embodiment, the silent data is also set after the sound data. FIG. 71 shows an example of a sound production data table in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, in the performance with the performance number p, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame in any sound source IC 85. Regarding the first sound source IC 85a, the sound data numbers indicating the sound source data after the sound data generation frame are set as number a, number a, number a, number x, number b, number b, and number b. As already explained, when the sound data number is x, silent data (H(0)) having a length of frame units is set. That is, in the p-th performance, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on the a-th sound data from the first frame, then performs the sound generation processing based on the x-th silent data, and then Performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of the number.

In the performance of number p, for the second sound source IC 85b, number x, number c, number c, number c, and number x are set as sound data numbers indicating the sound source data after the sound data generation frame. That is, in the p-th performance, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound generation processing based on the x-th silent data from the first frame, performs sound generation processing based on the c-th sound data, and then performs the sound generation processing based on the c-th sound data, and then Performs sound generation processing based on the silent data of the number. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, sound generation processing based on silent data may be performed from the first frame. In other words, depending on the number of substantial sound data generation frames (substantially corresponds to the second frame in the case of the second sound source IC 85b), the sound up to the substantial sound data generation frame As a data number, a sound data number corresponding to silent data is stored in advance.

In the performance number p in FIG. 71, the third sound source IC 85c represents a modification of the second sound source IC 85b. That is, in the second sound source IC 85b, among the sound data numbers x, c, c, c, and x, the x-th sound data number after the c-th is not stored, and the After the sound generation process based on the sound data corresponding to the sound data number is performed, no sound generation process is performed. Even in this case, although the total amount of sound data for the first sound source IC 85a and the total amount of sound data for the third sound source IC 85c will be different, the same production effect can be achieved as a sound production. It is possible to make the most of it.

In the performance number p in FIG. 71, the fourth sound source IC 85d shows a modification of the substantial sound data generation frame. That is, in this embodiment, the sound data generation frame is the first frame, and the sound data number corresponding to the silent data can be set in advance from the first frame. ) is not limited to only the first frame, but may be any period that corresponds to the frame in which the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed. In the fourth sound source IC 85d, sound generation processing based on the sound data (c number c sound data) is substantially performed from the third frame, and for the period corresponding to the first frame and the second frame, x The silent data of the number is set.

In this embodiment, the performance with the performance number q is particularly different from the performance with the number p in the length of the silent data set after the sound data. For example, for both the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b, the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, and the sound data number corresponding to the sound data is set from the first frame. There is. Specifically, for the first sound source IC 85a, sound data numbers a, a, a, a, a, y, b, b, and b are set. As already explained, when the sound data number is y, silent data (H(0)) with a length shorter than the length of the frame unit is set. In other words, in the q-th production, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on the a-th sound data from the first frame, and then performs the sound generation processing based on the y-th silent data in the middle of the frame. After that, sound generation processing is performed based on the b-th sound data.

In the performance of number q, sound data numbers of number c+1, number c+1, number c+1, number b+1, number a, number y, number b, number b, and number b are set for the second sound source IC 85b. As shown in FIG. 66, sound data of number c+1, sound data of number b+1, and sound data of number a have the same sound source data, but have different volume information. The volume is set to gradually decrease in this order. Therefore, in the production of number q, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of number c+1 from the first frame, and then gradually decreases the volume, and in the middle of the frame, the second sound source IC 85b generates sound based on the sound data of number c+1. Then, the sound generation process is performed based on the b-th sound data.

In the qth performance, the first frame and the third frame are set as sound data generation frames for the third sound source IC 85c. As the sound data numbers, number a, number a, and number a are set, and then, after a data blank period, number b, number b, and number b are set. In this case, in the sound data setting process (FIG. 64), the first frame and the third frame are recognized as the sound data generation frames in the process (step S3003) of determining the sound data generation frames. In step S3006 in this embodiment, it is determined whether the number of frames is 0 or more to determine whether the number of frames is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. That is, in step S3006 in this embodiment, an affirmative determination is always made. After that, in steps S3009 to S3012, silent data (y-th silent data) corresponding to the period up to the update timing of the third sound source IC 85c immediately before the update timing to the third frame is set, and the start timing The immediately preceding update timing of the third sound source IC 85c is set.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between frame update timing, sound production update timing, and sound data length in this embodiment.

When the p-th display performance and sound performance are started at timing t11, sound generation by sound generation processing is started in any of the first sound source IC 85a to fourth sound source IC 85d. In this case, the first sound source IC 85a starts sound generation processing based on sound data, while the second sound source IC 85b to fourth sound source IC 85d all start sound generation processing based on silent data.

At timing t12, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, the sound data for the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a is switched from sound data to silent data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a (the sound output from the first speaker 87a) changes from a sound that can be grasped by the player to a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp). Further, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation process of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c is switched from silent data to sound data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c (the sound output from the second speaker 87b and the third speaker 87c) is a sound that the player cannot (difficult to) understand. The sound changes to a comprehensible sound. Note that for the fourth sound source IC 85d, since the silent data is taken over from the silent data, the sound is not switched at the same timing.

At timing t13, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, the sound data of the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d is switched from silent data to sound data. Therefore, the sounds generated by the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d (sounds output from the first speaker 87a and the fourth speaker 87d) are sounds that the player cannot (difficult to) understand. The sound changes to a comprehensible sound. Also, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation process of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c is switched from sound data to silent data, or the sound generation process ends. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the second sound source IC 85b (the sound output from the second speaker 87b) changes from a sound that can be understood by the player to a sound that cannot be understood (difficult to understand). By ending (stopping) the sound generation process of the third sound source IC 85c, no sound is output from the third speaker 87c. Then, at the timing t14 when the third frame ends, the performance of the p number ends.

When the qth display performance and sound performance are started at timing t15, sound generation by sound generation processing is started in any of the first sound source IC 85a to third sound source IC 85c. Regarding the first sound source IC 85a, the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed even after the timing t16, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, and from the timing t20, which is the update timing to the third frame. At timing t18, which is the previous timing and is during the display period of the second frame, the process switches to sound generation processing based on silent data. Then, at the timing t20, the process switches again to the sound generation process based on the sound data, and continues the sound generation process based on the same sound data until the timing t21.

The second sound source IC 85b is the same as the first sound source IC 85a in that it performs sound generation processing based on sound data from the start timing (t15) of the first frame to the switching timing (t18) to silent data. However, the sound data (its volume information) is set so that the volume gradually decreases. That is, at timing t16, the volume becomes one step smaller than before, and at timing t17, the volume becomes even smaller than before. Then, at timing t18, the process switches to sound generation processing based on the silent data, and the player cannot hear the sound completely. Thereafter, it is the same as the first sound source IC 85a in that it switches to the sound data at the timing t20, and the sound generation process based on the sound data continues until the timing t21.

Regarding the third sound source IC 85c, the sound generation process is performed based on the sound data from the start of the first frame to the end of the first frame, but the sound generation process is temporarily terminated at timing t16 when the first frame ends. do. Thereafter, the sound generation process based on the silent data is restarted from the timing t19, which is the execution timing of the sound generation process immediately before the timing t20, which is the update timing to the third frame. Then, at timing t20, the process switches from silent data to sound generation processing based on sound data, and continues the sound generation processing based on the sound data until timing t21.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Silent data was set to be subject to sound generation processing after sound data. By doing this, it becomes possible to adjust the amount of sound data and playback length set in each sound source IC 85 using silent data. When silent data is set to be subject to sound generation processing before sound data, the amount of silent data to be set is determined by the order of the sound data generation frames, while silent data is set to be subject to sound generation processing after sound data. When setting silent data as follows, the set amount of silent data is not defined by the sound data generation frame. Therefore, when adjusting the total data amount and playback length, it is preferable to set silent data after sound data. In other words, depending on whether silent data is set after sound data, it is possible to adjust the data amount and playback length of sound data to be set.

Further, since silent data can be set after the sound data, a plurality of sound data generation frames can be set. In other words, it is possible to set a plurality of start timings for sound production in one sound source IC 85. In such a sound production having multiple start timings, if silent data is set between the sound data and the sound data, each sound source IC 85 can perform sound production based on the sound data without monitoring each start timing. The sound generation process can be performed sequentially, and the processing configuration can be significantly simplified.

Each sound data can be set so that the switching timing between sound data and non-sound data in one sound source IC 85 and the switching timing between sound data and non-sound data in another sound source IC 85 overlap. In a configuration in which sound production is performed using multiple sound source ICs 85, even if you try to control the start and end of the sound production by on/off control of sound playback without using silent data, some controls may not work due to the processing cycle. There is a possibility that it will be misaligned. In particular, when one is turned off and the other is turned on, if the off control is shifted first or the on control is shifted later, a blank period of sound production will occur. Conversely, if the off control is delayed or the on control is delayed first, the sound effects will unintentionally overlap. On that point, in the above configuration, since the silent data is used as a substitute for the on/off control, the sound source IC 85 does not need to know the timing to perform the on/off control, and it simply uses the set sound data. It is only necessary to sequentially perform the sound generation processing based on the above, and it is possible to avoid the occurrence of the inconvenience caused by the on/off control as described above.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, whether silence data is set or not depends on the type of performance. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the type of performance that is continued over a plurality of games as an example of the type of performance.

Examples of types of effects that continue over multiple games include a bonus effect shown in FIG. 73(a) and an attack mode effect shown in FIG. 73(b).

As already explained, the bonus state is set to end when a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and depending on the winning probability of the winning combination during the bonus and the number of medals paid out for the winning combination, the bonus status is set to end when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. The number of games to be played is a fixed number (24 games). The performance during the bonus is set to be different for each game, and the corresponding performance is set depending on the number of games played in the bonus state (in the continuous performance setting process of FIG. 54, the content is set to be different for each game). ).

For example, in the presentation during the bonus, the first to fifth games correspond to the opening presentation, and the presentation celebrating the bonus win (transition to the bonus state) continues for five games. For the 6th game to the 12th game, performances are performed for each winning BB depending on the type of won/transferred bonus (1st BB or 2nd BB). In the 13th game to the 19th game, effects are performed according to the winning display mode corresponding to the display mode in the game in which the bonus is won. In the 20th game to the 23rd game, as a special effect, for example, the presence or absence of simultaneous winning of attack mode and VB mode is announced. The 24th game corresponds to the ending performance, and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed.

The bonus performance is updated at the start timing of each game, more specifically at the operation timing of the start lever 41. In other words, for example, at the timing when the sixth game starts in a situation where an opening presentation is being performed, the opening presentation is updated to a winning BB specific presentation, and in a situation where a winning BB specific presentation is being performed, the opening presentation is updated to a winning BB specific presentation. At the timing when the 13th game starts, the performance for each winning BB is updated. Similarly, at the start timing of the 20th game, the performance based on winning BB was updated to the performance based on the winning display mode, and at the start timing of the 19th game, the performance based on the winning display mode was updated to the special performance. The ending effect is updated at the start timing of the 24th game.

As described above, the mid-bonus performance is a performance that continues over a plurality of games and is updated to a new performance when the game is advanced (start operation). In other words, if an operation that advances the game that triggers an update to a new production is not performed, the update to the new production will not be performed, and for example, after finishing the fifth game, the operation to start the sixth game will not be performed. If the game is not performed, the game waits at the time when the opening effects up to the fifth game are completed. More specifically, the display effects and sound effects are not updated until the game start operation that triggers the update is performed, and for example, the ending frame remains displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65, and the speaker The sound production from the device 64 stops generating sound at the point when the sound production corresponding to the frame at the end ends, and the production becomes silent (unless it overlaps with other productions). If so, the sound production can be performed). Alternatively, the display frame remains the same as the frame at the end, and as for the sound performance, for example, predetermined music is repeatedly played.

The effect during the attack mode is the effect that is set when the display mode shifts to the attack mode in the display mode setting process of step S1901. As shown in FIG. 73(b), from the start, after the opening performance, a first turn performance, a second turn performance, . . . a seventh turn performance are performed, and then the process returns to the first turn performance. The opening performance is performed for 15 seconds, and each subsequent turn performance switches to the next turn performance after 15 seconds have elapsed. In other words, excluding the opening performance, the first turn performance to the seventh turn performance are performed in 105 seconds, and one round is set as a loop performance of 105 seconds. For example, in the first turn, the front of the main character (female character)'s face is displayed close up, and in the second turn, the main character is shown running as seen from the left. The content of the production is set to differ depending on each turn, such as the third turn production showing the main character practicing serving a volleyball.

In this case, in the performance during the attack mode, the update timing of each turn performance is performed according to the passage of time. For example, even if the player does not perform a game operation (start operation or stop operation) during the attack mode, the performance during the attack mode will continue to progress over time.

In other words, the production during attack mode is a production that continues over multiple games, and the content of the production progresses over time, and when the game progresses (start operation), a new production is started. is not updated, and once the settings are made, the effect continues until a transition to another display mode occurs.

The sound data setting process in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74.

In this embodiment, in step S3201, processing for understanding the content of the current performance is executed. This process is similar to the process in step S3001 above. In the following step S3202, it is determined whether the content of the effect grasped in step S3201 is a loop effect. Specifically, the performance is not a performance that progresses based on game operations like the above-mentioned bonus performance, but a performance that progresses based on the passage of time like the attack mode performance, and the performance is looped at a predetermined period cycle. It is determined whether or not the performance is to be performed. If it is a loop performance, the process advances to step S3203, and a process of determining the value of the sound source counter K is performed. The processing from step S3203 to step S3216 is similar to the processing from step 3002 to step S3015 described above. That is, in the case of a loop performance, processing is performed to prevent sound deviation due to setting of silent data, as in the first and second embodiments.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3202 that it is not a loop performance, that is, if the current performance is, for example, a bonus performance, the process advances to step S3217. In step S3217, processing is performed to grasp the value of the sound source counter K, and the sound source IC 85 to be processed this time is specified. This process is similar to step S3203 (step S3002). Thereafter, in step S3218, processing is performed to determine the sound data generation frame in the same manner as in step S3204 (step S3003), and in step S3219, the processing for identifying the sound data generation frame and subsequent frames is performed in the same manner as in step S3205 (step S3004). Performs processing to understand the sound data address.

In the subsequent step S3220, processing is performed to identify the update timing of the sound source IC immediately before the sound data generation frame. This process is similar to the process in step S3210 (step S3009). Then, in step S3221, the timing specified in step S3220 is set as start timing information, and the start timing information and the information of the sound data address grasped in step S3219 are set in the current data output area 84a. Processing is performed to set the area corresponding to the sound source counter K. Then, in step S3222, an update process is performed to increment the sound source counter K by 1, and in step S3223, it is determined whether the upper limit value (24) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S3223, the process returns to step S3217; if an affirmative determination is made in step S3223, in step S3224, the sound source counter K is reset to the initial value (1), and then the sound data setting process is performed. end.

As described above, by adopting a configuration in which silent data is set during the loop performance, it is possible to efficiently eliminate the discrepancy with the display performance, especially when the discrepancy with the display performance is likely to occur.

In addition, while silent data is set during loop performances, silent data is not set for performances whose update timing is set according to the operation timing as the game progresses, so that the data corresponding to the silent data is It becomes possible to reduce the amount. In other words, for loop performances that are likely to cause discrepancies, we will try to avoid such discrepancies, and even if discrepancies occur, in cases where new performance settings will be made by subsequent game operations, we will try to avoid slight discrepancies. Since the configuration is configured to allow this occurrence and give priority to reducing the data setting amount, it is possible to maintain a suitable balance between the production effect and the processing load when performing various sound productions.

<Fourth embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the explanation has been given regarding the difference between the display effect and the sound effect, but in this embodiment, the explanation will be given regarding the difference between other effects and the sound effect. Here, as another effect, a reel rotation effect by controlling the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

In this embodiment, in the reel rotation performance, a specific performance is set in which a specific sound is generated at the timing when a predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, a specific sound is generated from the speaker device 64 at the timing when the 16th "Red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3 (lower row) as a predetermined position. . In this case, as long as the left reel 32L is rotating, the specific performance is continuously performed, and a specific sound is generated every time the 16th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower line L3.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As already explained, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is individually controlled by driving of each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses, and this excitation pulse controls the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel. The excitation pulse is output one pulse at a time in step S106 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the main controller 101. One excitation pulse is output at a cycle of 1.49 msec, which is the processing cycle of timer interrupt processing, and when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at a constant speed, the rotation angle based on the drive signal of one pulse, i.e. , the angle change for each timer interrupt process is approximately 0.714°. Further, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at a constant speed, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates once in 750.96 msec (1.49×504).

As already explained, the update period of sound data in the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85 is 10 msec, which is not divisible by a natural number from the update period of one revolution of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, when attempting to generate a specific sound at the update cycle of the sound generation process, a deviation of 0.96 msec per rotation may occur.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in a specific performance in which a specific sound is generated every time a predetermined pattern reaches a predetermined position, sound generation processing based on silent data is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the specific sound is generated. .

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the specific effect processing in this embodiment. This specific performance start process is a process executed when the rotation start process (step S402) of the reel control process (FIG. 18) is activated in the main control device 101. For example, in the rotation effect processing (step S401), this is carried out when a special effect generation lottery is won.

In step S3301, a process is performed to grasp the position of a predetermined symbol on the left reel 32L before the reel rotation starts. Specifically, from the number of the symbol stopped at a predetermined position (lower line L3), a process is performed to determine the amount of deviation from the number 16 "Red 7" symbol, which is the target of the special performance.

In the following step S3302, a process is performed to determine the period required to rotate at a constant speed based on the performance set in the rotation start performance, and to determine the period from the start of rotation until the predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position. Specifically, processing is performed to determine the period from when the rotation starts at a constant speed until the symbol targeted for special performance reaches a predetermined position, taking into consideration acceleration processing at the start of rotation and the like. In this case, for example, if a freeze effect that involves the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is set in the rotation start effect, the symbols targeted for the special effect will be placed in the predetermined position by taking into account that period. The period until reaching the goal is known.

Thereafter, in step S3303, a process is performed in which a sound production command including the period information ascertained in step S3302 is output to the sub-control device 81, and then this special production process is ended. The sub-control device 81 performs sound data setting processing based on the received sound production command, and causes each sound source IC 85 to perform sound generation processing to generate a specific sound in the special production.

In this case, in the sound data setting process, silent data is set for a period up to constant speed rotation. Then, after reaching the constant speed rotation, sound data with a length of 24 pulses (35.76 msec = 1.49 msec x 24 processes), which is one symbol when the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position, and 20 Silent data with a length of 480 pulses (715.2 msec) corresponding to the symbols are set as a loop performance that is alternately subjected to sound generation processing.

FIG. 77 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the symbol position of the left reel 32L and sound data in the special performance.

When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started at timing t22, the rotation reaches constant speed at timing t23 after an acceleration period. Thereafter, at timing t24, the 16th "red 7" symbol as a predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3. The predetermined symbol passes through the lower line L3 by the timing t25, and the next symbol (the 17th "watermelon" symbol) reaches the lower line L3 at the timing t25. Then, the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3 again at the next arrival timing t26, and the next symbol reaches the lower line L3 at the timing t27.

In this case, in the period from timing t22 to timing t24, silent data is set as the sound data corresponding to the sound source IC 85 (denoted as the n-th sound source IC in the figure) that performs the sound performance in the special performance. Also, in the period from t24 to t25, sound data is set, and in the period from t25 to t26, silent data is set. Then, the sound data is set at the timing from t26 to t27, and thereafter, the sound data is set as a loop effect so that the sound data is set for each rotation period.

As described above, when performing sound production synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, by setting silent data and sound data according to the rotation cycle, the update cycle of the sound production side can be adjusted. , it becomes possible to suitably perform sound production synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without changing the control mode of rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In particular, when a sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is used as a so-called eye-pressing aid to indicate that a predetermined symbol has reached a predetermined position, there is a discrepancy between the sound effect and the rotational position of the reel. When this occurs, not only is there an inconvenience that the degree of attention is reduced due to the discrepancy, but also the sound performance that serves as an index becomes meaningless when performing eye presses based on the eye press aid. On the contrary, this will put the player at a disadvantage. However, in order to avoid such sound deviations, if the reel rotation control mode is adjusted to the sound production side, it may induce a mistake in pressing due to the difference between when pressing assistance is not performed. Even if you try to perform sound production by waiting for a predetermined picture to reach a predetermined position without using silent data, you will be forced to change the update timing of the sound production side, which would require major design changes. That's what it takes. In this regard, if the configuration is configured to synchronize with the rotation period using silent data as described above, it is possible to avoid the deviation with a simple configuration.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the processing cycle of the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R depends on the processing cycle of the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 101 (1.49 msec), and the processing cycle of the sound source IC 85 (10 msec). have an indivisible relationship with each other, and also have an indivisible relationship with the processing cycle (33.3 msec) of the display control device 201. In other words, for example, even if a configuration is adopted in which the processing cycle is synchronized without using silent data in order to synchronize the display effect and the sound effect as in the first to third embodiments, this embodiment If an attempt is made to add a synchronized effect between the effect and the sound effect on the main control device 101 side, it becomes necessary to further synchronize the processing cycles. In this regard, by using silent data as in the above configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize each processing cycle with the performance without changing any processing cycle.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) The sub-control device 81 sets sound data for the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on the sound data to realize sound production, but the sub-control device 81 itself may be able to control each amplifier 86 and individual speaker 87 based on sound data.

(2) The processing cycle of the V interrupt processing in the display control device 201, the processing cycle of the sound generation processing in the sound source IC 85, and the processing cycle of the timer interrupt processing by the main control device 101 are not limited to those described above. It is sufficient that these processing cycles are different from each other. More specifically, if they are not divisible, deviations are likely to occur, so that the benefits of applying each of the above inventions can be brought about.

(3) In the sound data setting process, all the sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set, but the sound source IC 85 for the sound data to be set may be changed depending on the content of the performance. For example, for the first performance, the sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j is set, and for the second performance, the sound data for the 11th sound source IC 85k to the 20th sound source IC 85t is set,
In the case of the third performance, the sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the fifteenth sound source IC 85о may be set to avoid duplication of the sound source ICs 85 set depending on the content of the performance, or the sound source IC 85 may be set depending on the content of the performance. It may also be possible to cause duplication of . In these cases, it is preferable that the sound data generation frames of each sound source IC 85 are set to be different, and whether or not silent data is set, the length of silent data to be set, start timing information, etc. are different depending on the sound source IC 85. It is better to make it . Further, for example, the 21st to 23rd sound source ICs 85u to 23rd sound source ICs 85w may be configured not to be used during normal times, but to be used as substitutes when a problem (such as a failure) occurs in the other sound source ICs 85.

(4) In the sound data setting process, the sound data of each sound source IC 85 is set individually, but in this process, the sound data is set based on the sound data generation frame of the sound source IC 85. The sound source IC 85 may be different from the one that does not. That is, for example, for the sound source IC 85 in which the number of frames generating sound data is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of frames, sound data may not be set in the current process. In this case, if the sub-control device 81 temporarily stores the timing corresponding to the sound data generation frame for the sound source IC 85, and sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85 at a timing earlier than the timing. good. By doing this, the sound source IC 85 does not need to estimate the start timing for the sound source IC 85 to which the sound data is set later. Moreover, by doing so, it becomes possible to set the sound data of each sound source IC 85 at different timings, and by distributing the setting processing, it is possible to avoid a temporary increase in the processing load.

(5) A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not silent data is set depends on the content of the sound data generation frame in the display performance. For example, if the difference (for example, color tone, presence or absence of a character, character movement, brightness, etc.) from the immediately preceding frame is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, silent data is set as a sound data generation frame. If the difference from the frame is less than a predetermined value, silent data may not be set. It is thought that the larger the difference from the previous frame, the easier it is to notice the discrepancy between the sound performance and the display performance, but by doing the above, the discrepancy can be detected using silent data for performances where the discrepancy is easy to notice. For productions where it is difficult to notice the deviation, a configuration may be adopted in which the deviation is allowed without using silent data and the amount of setting data is reduced.

(6) It may be configured to vary whether or not to set silent data depending on the content of the sound production. For example, silent data may be set for a performance in which a sound performance is started when the volume information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and no sound data may be set for a performance in which a sound performance is started when the volume information is less than a predetermined value. This is because it is thought that the larger the volume, the easier it will be to notice a discrepancy between the sound performance and the display performance if it occurs.

In addition, there are effects that start a sound effect with sound source data in a frequency band that is easy for players to recognize, and effects that start a sound effect with sound source data in a frequency band that is more difficult for players to recognize than that frequency band. may be set or not, and silent data may be set for performances in frequency bands that are easy to recognize, and no silent data may be set for performances in frequency bands that are difficult to recognize.

(7) The silent data is sound data in which the generated sound cannot be understood or is difficult to understand, regardless of the setting values of each Vol switch 75, 76, but at least the second Vol switch 76 for player operation Regardless of the setting value, it is sufficient that the sound data is such that the player is unable or difficult to understand the sound, and depending on the setting value of the first Vol switch 75 for the game hall manager, it becomes possible to understand the generated sound. It may also be a configuration.

(8) Silent data is stored in advance in a length corresponding to the length of each frame or the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process, but the length of the silent data to be stored is is not limited to the above length, and may have other lengths. Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which silence data of a predetermined period length is stored in advance, a configuration may be adopted in which the length can be changed each time. For example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is known, it may be possible to create silent data with a length equal to that number of frames each time, or the amount of discrepancy between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process. When the amount of deviation is determined, it may be possible to create silent data of a length corresponding to the amount of deviation each time. Furthermore, for example, silence data with a length of a specific period (for example, 0.01 msec), which is a relatively short period of time, may be stored in advance, and the silence data with the length of the specific period may be stored in advance according to the determined length. A configuration may also be adopted in which silent data is set so that playback is performed repeatedly. In this case, it is preferable to set the length of the specific period so that the frame length (approximately 33.3 msec) and the amount of deviation are divisible by a natural number.

(9) In the sound data setting process, the sound data generation frame is specified and then the silent data and sound data are set. A configuration may also be adopted in which data sets in which the order of reproduction (generation) is determined in advance are prepared. More specifically, for example, for the first performance, after sound generation processing based on silent data is performed over a first period, sound generation processing based on sound data is performed over a second period. A first data set of silent data and sound data is stored in advance, and for the second performance, after sound generation processing based on the silent data is performed for a third period, the sound data is A second data set of silent data and sound data is stored in advance so that the sound generation process based on the above is performed over a fourth period. Then, in the sound data setting process for the first performance, the first data set is read and set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound data setting process for the second performance, the second data set is read out and set in the data output area 84a. The data set is read out and set in the data output area 84a. In this way, there is no need to specify the sound data generation frame for each performance, and the processing when a performance occurs can be simplified. Note that each of the above data sets includes not only a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on sound data after silent data, but also a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on silent data after sound data. Alternatively, a repeating pattern of silent data and sound data may be included.

(10) In the sound data setting process, the address information of the sound data is set in the data output area 84a, but the sound source data itself may be set. In this way, in the sound generation process of each sound source IC 85, there is no need to perform the process of acquiring sound source data based on the address information, and it is only necessary to read (play) the sound source data of the data output area 84a. Processing on the sound source IC 85 side can be simplified.

(11) Although the configuration is such that sound data is exchanged between the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 via the data output area 84a, the configuration may be such that the sound data is exchanged using commands or the like. Specifically, in the sound data setting process, a command including the sound data (address information) and sound source data to be set in the data output area 84a is output to the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on the command. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following. In this case, instead of a configuration in which the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 can communicate bidirectionally, a configuration in which the sub-control device 81 can communicate unidirectionally with the sound source IC 85 (bi-directional communication is not possible) may be used.

(12) Although the display control device 201 and the sub-control device 81 are configured so that two-way communication is not possible and one-way communication is possible from the sub-control device 81 to the display control device 201, two-way communication is possible. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the display control device 201 is configured to output the update timing to the sound data generation frame (processing timing of V interrupt processing) to the sub-control device 81, and the sound source IC 85 The configuration may be such that the sound generation process is started at . Even in this case, for example, in a production in which there are multiple sound data generation frames, if the configuration is such that sound generation processing based on silent data is performed before the rear sound data generation frame, the previous sound data generation frame can be After the display control device 201 outputs the update timing to the sound data generation frame to the sub-control device 81 and starts the sound generation process at that timing, it is only necessary to repeat the sound generation process on the sound source IC 85 side. Since there is no need to output such information from the display control device 201 to the sub-control device 81 during the subsequent sound data generation frame, processing can be simplified.

(13) As silent data, sound data is set in which a sound that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp is output from the corresponding individual speaker 87 by sound generation processing. It is also possible to set sound data that outputs a sound that can be grasped, but that is difficult to grasp or cannot be grasped due to interference with the sound output from another individual speaker 87. That is, the sound data set for the first sound source IC 85 is set as first sound data, and the sound data set for the second sound source IC 85 is set as second sound data. In this case, the first sound that can be output by the sound generation process based on the first sound data and the second sound that can be output by the sound generation process based on the second sound data are sounds that can be understood by the player. Although the first sound data and the second sound data are set so that The configuration is such that the sound on one side is drowned out. Then, the first sound data is set to the first sound source IC 85 and the second sound data is set to the second sound source IC 85 so that the sound generation processing of the first sound data and the second sound data is performed simultaneously. The configuration is as follows. Even in this case, if the sound generation process for the third sound that the player can grasp is performed following the first and second sounds, the output start timing of the third sound can be adjusted by the sound generation process. This allows settings to be made independent of update timing.

(14) The first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w may be classified according to performance or purpose, and the sound source IC 85 for setting sound data may be configured to be different depending on the performance or purpose. For example, the sound production performed together with the display production is performed by the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j, and the sound production together with the rotation production of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed by the eleventh sound source IC 85k to the 20th sound source IC 85j. The configuration is such that the sound source IC 85t performs the sound production, and the sound production for error notification is performed by the 21st sound source IC 85u to the 23rd sound source ICw. In the sound data setting process, the sound data for the corresponding sound source IC 85 is set, while the sound data for the uncorresponding sound source IC 85 is not set. In this way, there is no need to set sound data for the sound source IC 85 that is not used, and the processing can be simplified.

(15) Although the sub-control device 81 controls each sound source IC 85, the display control device 201 may control each sound source IC 85, or the main control device 101 may control each sound source IC 85. good. Alternatively, each sound source IC 85 may be connected to each of the control devices 81, 101, and 201, and different sound source ICs 85 may be controlled by the control devices 81, 101, and 201.

(16) The sound source IC 85 is configured to start the sound generation process based on a predetermined performance trigger, but the sound source IC 85 is configured to always execute the sound generation process based on silent data, and the sound generation process is started based on the predetermined performance trigger. If this occurs, it may be configured to rewrite the sound data as the original data of the sound generation process currently being executed. Specifically, the sound source IC 85 is configured to repeatedly perform sound generation processing, for example, at a predetermined period (10 msec) after power is turned on. If it is not the timing to perform the performance, the address information of the sound data that is the source of the sound generation process is the address information of the silent data. In other words, a state in which sound is being output based on silent data is a standby state. When a predetermined performance trigger occurs, the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81 changes the address information of the silent data set in the data output area 84a to the address of the sound data corresponding to the current performance. The configuration is such that it is rewritten to information. By doing so, the sound source IC 85 only needs to repeatedly perform sound generation processing (sound output), and the configuration of the sound source IC 85 can be simplified.

(17) The performance performed in conjunction with the sound performance is not limited to the display performance or the rotation performance of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, but may also be an action performance using an accessory that can perform a predetermined action, or an LED display. It may also be a light-emitting effect using a light-emitting unit such as. As an example of the motion production, for example, by driving and controlling a predetermined drive unit, the accessory can be displaced between a first position and a second position, and an action of displacing the accessory from the first position to the second position at a predetermined timing. Set the performance. Then, a sound effect is performed so that a predetermined sound is generated at the timing of displacement to the second position. In such a configuration, if the discrepancy that may occur due to the relationship between the drive cycle of the drive control of a predetermined drive unit and the update cycle of the sound generation process is compensated for using silent data, the timing of displacement to the second position and It becomes possible to match the timing at which the predetermined sound is generated.

(18) In the configuration where the sound production and the rotation production of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed together, the sound generation process is performed based on silent data except at the timing when a predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position. For example, sound generation processing may be performed based on sound data in which the setting value of the volume information gradually increases so that the volume increases as the user approaches a predetermined position, or the volume decreases as the user moves away from the predetermined position. Sound generation processing may be performed based on sound data in which the setting value of the volume information gradually decreases. In these cases, the sound generation process based on the silent data may be performed at least at some timing before the predetermined pattern has reached the predetermined position. That is, regardless of the length of the silent data, any configuration is sufficient as long as the discrepancy between the rotation period of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the generation period of the specific sound can be compensated for by the silent data.

(19) In a configuration where the sound production and the rotation production of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed together, a specific sound is generated while each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotating at a constant speed. A configuration may also be adopted in which the rotation and the sound production during the period up to this point (during the acceleration period) are synchronized. Specifically, a freeze effect in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated at low speed during an invalid operation period of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be synchronized with a sound effect.

(20) When an effect command is output in the display data setting process in the effect data setting process on the sub-control device 81 side, the display control device 201 starts updating the frame at the update timing of the subsequent V interrupt process. Therefore, there may be a case where there is a difference in the start timing of the display effect and the sound effect. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the V interrupt processing of the display control device 201 is started based on the reception of the production command (a configuration similar to the sound generation processing on the sound source IC 85 side), or After enabling two-way communication between the A configuration may also be adopted in which the production command is output and the sound data setting process is performed.

(21) In the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, each address information of the sound data number corresponding to the performance number is set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, each address information is set. The configuration is such that sound source data is acquired individually based on the performance number, and sound is generated by connecting sound source data with a predetermined playback length, but the sound source data having the playback length of the entire performance corresponding to the performance number is stored. A configuration may also be adopted in which the sound source data having the playback length of the entire performance is read out and the sound is generated.

(22) In the sound data setting process, whether to set silent data on a frame-by-frame basis or whether to set silent data based on the amount of deviation is configured to vary depending on the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame. , the number of frames is not limited to the above (150). Further, it may be configured to vary depending on the presentation content, regardless of the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame, or in addition to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame.

(23) If the sound data generation frame is after 1/3 sec, which is the common divisor of the update cycle of the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85 and the update cycle of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201, then A configuration may also be adopted in which sound generation processing using silent data is performed on a frame-by-frame basis with an update period that is a natural number multiple.

(24) In the sound data setting process, we varied whether to set silent data based on the length of each frame or set silent data with a length corresponding to the amount of deviation, but depending on the length of each frame and the amount of deviation It may also be possible to set silence data with a length that is the sum of the corresponding length.

(25) As a loop performance, we have shown an example of a performance during attack mode, showing a configuration in which the first turn performance to the seventh turn performance are performed, and then the first turn performance to the seventh turn performance are performed again, but the entire performance There is no need to loop, just a part of it. For example, the configuration may be such that the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect are performed, then the first turn effect is performed, and after the sixth turn effect is performed, the first turn effect is returned. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the portion to be looped is different for each loop. For example, after performing the first turn performance to the seventh turn performance, the first turn performance to the sixth turn performance may be performed, and then the second turn performance to the seventh turn performance may be performed.

(26) In a configuration in which the playback length of the sound data for each sound source IC 85 is matched by setting silent data as the sound data for each sound source IC 85, the silent data is set after all sound data. Good too. For example, for the first sound source IC 85a, the playback of the sound data ends at the first timing, and for the second sound source IC 85b, the playback of the sound data ends at the second timing after the first timing. , by setting silent data from the first timing to the second timing as the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a, the timings at which the reproduction of sounds of the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b end coincide with each other. I can do it. In this case, a configuration may also be adopted in which silent data for the second sound source IC 85b is set up to a timing after the second timing, and that silent data is also set for the first sound source IC 85a. In addition to the above, when the reproduction of the sound data of the third sound source IC 85c ends at a third timing that is later than the second timing, the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a is reproduced from the first timing to the third timing. By setting silence data for the minutes up to the timing of , and setting silence data for the minutes from the second timing to the third timing as the sound data of the second sound source IC 85c, the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source It is possible to match the timing at which the IC85c ends the sound reproduction.

(27) Although a slot machine has been described that is equipped with three reels and three stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel, the configuration is not limited to this. For example, a slot machine is equipped with five reels and stop switches corresponding to the reels in parallel. It may also be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operations in stopping the reels, it is sufficient to have at least two reels and stop switches corresponding thereto. Furthermore, although a slot machine has been described in which the active line is set to 1 line when the number of bets is 3, the present invention is not limited to this configuration; for example, the active line may be 5 lines.

(28) Although a specific example has been shown for the slot machine 10, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a slot machine and a pachinko machine. That is, in place of the medal insertion and medal payout functions among slot machines, it may be a gaming machine that has ball insertion and ball payout functions, such as a pachinko machine. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

In addition, there are pachinko machines of the type where game balls are launched into the game area and a jackpot lottery is held based on the game ball hitting the starting prize opening, and when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, an electric accessory is activated. Pachinko machines that open a predetermined number of times, pachinko machines that win a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines that are equipped with other accessories, arranged ball machines, mahjong balls, etc. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configurations extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

The inventions shown in each feature group below are as follows: ``Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as types of gaming machines.In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions. There is a known configuration in which a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, when a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, an internal lottery is carried out, and the reels start rotating.If the stop switch is operated while the reels are rotating, the reels stop rotating.Then, the reel stop result is determined by the internal lottery. If the result corresponds to the result of the above-mentioned internal lottery, a benefit is given according to the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). As a type of performance, sound production may be performed by a sound generating means such as a speaker.'' Regarding the background technology, ``Here, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, optimization of the performance is required, for example. There is still room for improvement regarding sound production.'' This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. A predetermined production means (a function for executing display data setting processing by the sub-control device 81, a display (a function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201);
a sound production means (sub) that executes a sound production corresponding to the predetermined production by the predetermined production means using sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87); a function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85),
A gaming machine comprising:
a first updating means (a function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect in a first cycle (approximately 33.3 msec);
a second update means (a function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation control by the sound generation means in a second cycle (10 msec) different from the first cycle;
Equipped with
The sound production means is
comprising a setting means (a function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) for setting sound information (sound data) of the sound production corresponding to the predetermined production by the predetermined production means,
The sound generation means sequentially generates sounds for the sound production based on the sound information set by the setting means,
The setting means sets, as the sound information, special information (silence data) that makes it difficult or impossible for a player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means, by the sound generation means corresponding to the special information. A gaming machine characterized in that the sound generation can be set to be performed at least one of before and after a predetermined update timing in the first period.

In a gaming machine where a predetermined effect that is updated in the first cycle is executed together with a sound effect that generates sound in the second cycle, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so the processing is distributed. However, due to the difference in the period, there is a high possibility that there will be a lag between the update timing of the predetermined performance and the timing of sound generation in the sound performance. If such a discrepancy occurs, not only will it not be possible to fully expect the performance effects of the predetermined effects and sound effects, but the discrepancy will also discourage players and cause a decrease in the level of attention. It can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first cycle is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand. In this way, it becomes possible to switch between sound and silence at the update timing of the predetermined effect, and it becomes possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect. This makes it possible to suitably perform sound effects.

Furthermore, "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means" means "special information that makes the sound generated by the sound generation means difficult or impossible for the player to understand." It may be expressed as "special information that causes no sound to be generated by the sound generating means" or may be expressed as "special information that causes no sound to be generated by the sound generating means."

Further, the "sound generating means" may also be referred to as "sound outputting means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information that makes the sound output by the sound output means difficult or impossible for the player to understand."

Furthermore, "at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period" may be expressed as "at least one immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period".

Feature A2. A predetermined production means (a function for executing display data setting processing by the sub-control device 81, a display (a function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201);
a sound production means (sub) that executes a sound production corresponding to the predetermined production by the predetermined production means using sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87); a function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85),
A gaming machine comprising:
a first updating means (a function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect in a first cycle (approximately 33.3 msec);
a second updating means (a function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation by the sound generation means in a second period (10 msec) different from the first period;
Equipped with
The sound production means is
a setting means for setting sound information of the sound production corresponding to the predetermined production by the predetermined production means (a function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81);
output means (a function for executing the processes of step S3008, step S3012, etc. by the sub-control device 81) for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means;
Equipped with
The sound generation means sequentially generates sounds for the sound performance based on the sound information outputted by the output means,
The setting means sets, as the sound information, special information (silence data) that makes it difficult or impossible for a player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means, by the sound generation means corresponding to the special information. A gaming machine characterized in that the sound generation can be set to be performed at least one of before and after a predetermined update timing in the first period.

In a gaming machine where a predetermined effect that is updated in the first cycle is executed together with a sound effect that generates sound in the second cycle, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so the processing is distributed. However, due to the difference in the cycle, there is a high possibility that there will be a lag between the update timing of the predetermined performance and the timing of sound generation in the sound performance. If such a discrepancy occurs, not only will it not be possible to fully expect the performance effects of the predetermined effects and sound effects, but the discrepancy will also discourage players and cause a decrease in the level of attention. It can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first cycle is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand. In this way, it becomes possible to switch between sound and silence at the update timing of the predetermined effect, and it becomes possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the sound production means includes a setting means for setting sound information, and an output means for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means, and the sound production means Since the configuration is such that sounds are sequentially generated based on the sound information output by the output means, the setting means can leave the sound generation to the sound generation means after setting the sound information, and the setting means Processing is also decentralized regarding the sound generating means and the sound generating means. By doing this, when a new performance opportunity occurs and you try to set sound information, there is a possibility that the setting process based on the previous performance opportunity and the setting process based on the new performance opportunity will overlap. can be reduced. In this way, by decentralizing the processing between the predetermined production means and the sound production means, and further decentralizing the processing between the setting means and the sound production means, the sound production can be performed as described above. While adding functions such as adjusting the generation timing, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load and perform sound production in a suitable manner.

Furthermore, "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means" means "special information that makes the sound generated by the sound generation means difficult or impossible for the player to understand." It may be expressed as "special information that causes no sound to be generated by the sound generating means" or may be expressed as "special information that causes no sound to be generated by the sound generating means."

Further, the "sound generating means" may also be referred to as "sound outputting means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information that makes the sound output by the sound output means difficult or impossible for the player to understand."

Furthermore, "at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period" may be expressed as "at least one immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period".

Feature A3. The setting means includes, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generating means, and generates a sound by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the normal information is set to be performed before or after the special information with the predetermined update timing in between.

According to the above configuration, switching between the sound generation process based on the special information and the sound generation process based on the normal information occurs at a predetermined update timing. This makes it possible to match the predetermined update timing in the predetermined production with the start or end timing of the sound production.

Feature A4. The setting means includes, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generating means, and generates a sound by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the normal information can be set to be performed after the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set after the special information, it is possible for the player to understand the sound at the update timing. Therefore, the update timing of the predetermined effect and the start timing of the sound effect can be matched.

Feature A5. The setting means includes, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generating means, and generates a sound by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the normal information can be set to be performed before the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set before the special information, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound at the update timing. Therefore, it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect and the end timing of the sound effect.

Feature A6. The setting means determines, for a specific period after a period during which the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information generates a sound, the sound generation means does not generate a sound corresponding to the normal information after the specific period. If so, the special information is set so that the sound generated by the sound generation means corresponding to the special information is generated for the specified period, and the sound generated by the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information is generated after the specified period. The gaming machine according to feature A5, characterized in that if the generation of the special information is not performed, the special information is not set for the specific period.

According to the above configuration, when sound information is set in the order of normal information → special information, if sound is generated in the order of normal information → special information → normal information, the special information is set; After setting the normal information to special information, if the sound of the normal information is not generated, the special information is not set. In this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of setting data.

Feature A7. According to any one of features A1 to A6, the first period is a period longer than the second period and has a length different from an integral multiple of the second period. gaming machines.

According to the above configuration, since the first period is not an integral multiple of the second period, there is likely to be a shift in the update timing between the first period and the second period. If the structure of feature A1 is applied to the production of the cycle of such a relationship, it becomes possible to suitably eliminate the discrepancy between the two productions (the predetermined production and the sound production).

In addition, regarding a configuration in which the second period is longer than the first period, if the second period is configured to have a length different from an integral multiple of the first period, it is possible to achieve the same effect as above. be.

Feature A8. comprising a display means having a predetermined display screen;
The predetermined effect is characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed by controlling the display means to update a frame image displayed on the predetermined display screen in a first cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is a display effect, and the frame image is updated in the first cycle. Generally, updating of frame images in display effects is performed by setting and updating each pixel that makes up the display screen, but if you try to change the update timing of such frame images, it is necessary to update the settings and updates of each pixel. need to be changed. In this regard, as mentioned above, since the special information is set before or after the frame image update timing, it is possible to match the output start timing and output end timing of the sound in the sound production with the update timing of the frame image. , it is possible to match the start and end timings of both performances without changing the update timing on the frame image side.

Feature A9. Start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame in which the sound production by the sound generation means starts from among the predetermined production (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: a function of executing step S3004, etc.) Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the setting means sets the special information based on a grasp result by the start frame grasping means.

According to the above configuration, by determining the start frame of the sound production and setting special information according to the start frame, it is possible to match the start timing of the sound production with the update timing of the start frame. It becomes possible.

Feature A10. comprising means (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub-control device 81) for storing the special information in advance in the length of the first cycle unit;
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the special information in a length of the first cycle unit.

According to the above configuration, the special information is set in units (frame units) corresponding to the update period of the unit frame image. By doing this, it becomes much easier to adjust the length of the special information in order to match the start and end timing of the sound production with the update timing of the frame image, and the process for matching the timing becomes simpler. It is possible to aim for

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the special information with a length shorter than the first period.

According to the above configuration, the amount of data to be set is reduced and the degree of freedom in the length of special information to be set is improved. Therefore, in eliminating sound deviations, the configuration is capable of dealing with various deviations.

Feature A12. Start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame in which the sound production by the sound generation means starts from among the predetermined production (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: a function of executing step S3004, etc.) and,
a period grasping unit (a function for executing processes such as step S3009 and step S3010 by the sub-control device 81) for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second cycle before the start frame to the start frame;
Equipped with
Any one of features A8 to A11, characterized in that the setting means is capable of setting the special information to the length of the period (for example, about 3.3 msec) ascertained by the period ascertaining means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the length of the special information can be minimized. By doing so, it is possible to match the start and end timings of the sound performance and the display performance while reducing the data amount of sound information to be set.

Feature A13. Start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame in which the sound production by the sound generation means starts from among the predetermined production (process for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: a function of executing step S3004, etc.) and,
means for pre-storing the special information in the length of the first cycle unit (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub-control device 81);
a period grasping unit (a function for executing processes such as step S3009 and step S3010 by the sub-control device 81) for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second cycle before the start frame to the start frame;
Equipped with
The setting means includes:
a first means capable of setting the special information in the length of the first period unit;
and a second means capable of setting the special information with the length of the period (for example, about 3.3 msec) grasped by the period grasping means,
If the grasping result by the start frame grasping means is that the start frame is earlier than a predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect, the first means sets the special information, and the start frame The gaming machine according to feature A4, wherein if the result is that the number of frames is a predetermined number of frames after the start of the predetermined performance, the special information is set by the second means.

According to the above configuration, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the special information is set in a frame unit length, and when the number of frames up to the start frame is large, the special information is set in a length corresponding to the amount of deviation. Special information is set. By doing this, for example, if the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the display effect and the start of sound generation based on special information can be synchronized, eliminating the need to judge the start timing. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load, and when the number of frames up to the start frame is large, it becomes possible to reduce the amount of data to be set.

Feature A14. having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means includes:
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generating means,
The sound information set for the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means is set so that the sound corresponding to the special information is generated at least before and after the first update timing in the first period. on the other hand,
Among the plurality of sound generating means, the sound information set for a second sound generating means different from the first sound generating means is set when the sound corresponding to the special information is generated in the first period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the gaming machine can be configured to perform at least one of before and after a second update timing different from the first update timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration including a plurality of sound generation means, the timing at which the sound corresponding to the special information is generated differs depending on the sound generation means. By doing so, not only the sound production can be made more profound, but also the effect of feature A1 can be achieved at a plurality of update timings in a predetermined production.

Feature A15. having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means includes:
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generating means,
the sound information set for a first sound generation means of the plurality of sound generation means, so that the sound corresponding to the special information is generated at a predetermined timing;
The sound information set for a second sound generation means different from the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means allows the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the sound corresponding to the normal information (sound data) can be generated at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, at a predetermined timing when the first sound generation means generates a sound regarding special information, the second sound generation means generates a sound regarding normal information. is generated. That is, at a predetermined timing, the sound generated by the first sound generation means is difficult or impossible to grasp, but the sound generated from the second sound generation means can be grasped. As a result, rather than making it difficult or impossible to understand all the sounds in a given performance at a given timing, it becomes possible to understand any one of the sounds. It becomes possible to realize an effect in which sounds are continuously generated while overlapping the sounds of the means.

Feature A16. As the predetermined performance by the predetermined performance means, the update processing by the first update means is performed, whereby performances from a predetermined first performance to a second performance are executed, and after the execution of the second performance. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein a special performance (loop performance, for example, a performance for attack mode) that returns to the first performance is set.

In the above configuration, as the predetermined performance, a special performance is set as a so-called loop performance in which the performances from the first performance to the second performance are executed and then the performance returns to the first performance. In gaming machines that have such special effects, once the special effect is set, it is only necessary to repeatedly execute the special effect, which reduces the processing load compared to the case where separate effects are set. is dramatically reduced. In this case, while performing the special performance, there will be a processing lag to perform other performances, making it possible to suitably enhance the performance effect. On the other hand, in gaming machines where such special effects are set, if there is a discrepancy between the update timing of the special performance and the start/end timing of the sound performance, the discrepancy is cumulative for each loop. There is a possibility that it will increase. In this regard, as described in feature A1, the special information is set so that such a deviation does not occur, so it is possible to suitably enjoy the production effect of the loop production.

Feature A17. A game progress means (a function for executing normal processing by the main controller 101) that performs game progress processing when a specific event based on a game operation by a player (for example, the start of a game based on the operation of the start lever 41) occurs. )and,
a first performance means (a function for executing the bonus performance by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined first performance (performance during the bonus);
a second performance means (a function of executing the performance during attack mode by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a second performance (performance during attack mode) different from the first performance;
When the specific event occurs during the execution of the first performance, means for updating the first performance (sub-control device 81 subtracting the bonus performance counter: a function of executing the process of step S2615);
Means for updating the second effect based on the execution time of the second effect reaching a predetermined update cycle (a function for executing processing for updating the effect during attack mode by the sub-control device 81) )and,
When the first performance is performed by the first performance means, setting of the special information is restricted by the setting means, while when the second performance is performed by the second performance means, , means for allowing the special information to be set by the setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3202 by the sub-control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, a first performance in which the performance is updated based on a game operation (specific event) by the player, and a second performance in which the performance is updated based on the passage of time are set. . The game operation by the player is performed at the player's free timing, and updating the first performance requires a certain degree of freedom. In this case, for example, even if the special information is set so that the start or end timing of the sound production matches the update timing for the first production, the special information may be changed due to the update occurring at a free timing as described above. Settings may be wasted. Therefore, by configuring a configuration in which special information is not set for the first performance, but special information is set for the second performance, the special information can be set as necessary, and the setting You can make sure that nothing goes to waste.

Feature A18. The predetermined effect means includes a first predetermined effect means capable of executing a first predetermined effect (display effect) (a function of executing display data setting processing by the sub-control device 81, a function of executing V-interruption processing by the display control device 201). ), and a second predetermined effect (a function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second predetermined effect (rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the first predetermined effect. and
The first updating means includes a first specific updating means (V interrupt by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the first predetermined effect by the first predetermined effect at a first specific period (approximately 33.3 msec). a second specific updating means capable of executing an update process of the second predetermined effect by the second predetermined effect at a second specific cycle (1.49 msec) different from the first specific cycle; (a function for executing timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized by comprising:

There are a wide variety of sound effects in gaming machines, and for example, a display effect and a sound effect may be performed as a set as a first predetermined effect, or a movement effect using a movable accessory and a sound effect may be performed as a set as a second predetermined effect. It is common to do so. In such a configuration, if the update cycle of the first predetermined effect and the update cycle of the second predetermined effect are different, the design may be changed by making the update cycle of one effect match the update cycle of the sound effect, etc. Even so, there is a possibility that a discrepancy with the sound production may occur in relation to the update cycle of the other production. On that point, if the configuration of feature A1 is applied to such a configuration, it will be possible to use special information to avoid misalignment in relation to a wide variety of performances, and it will be possible to avoid major changes in the design. It is possible to suitably realize sound production without the need for this.

Feature A19. Operating means (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for performing a predetermined operation;
a drive unit (a function for executing reel control processing by the main controller 101) that performs the predetermined operation by driving and controlling the operating unit at a predetermined drive cycle;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined update timing occurs at the predetermined drive cycle by the drive means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined performance is a performance based on the operation of the operating means, and the sound performance is performed in conjunction with the operation of the operating means. The operations of the operating means are visually flashy and tend to attract the attention of players, but if there is a discrepancy between the operations and the sound production, the more flashy the operations, the more the players will There is a high possibility that the person will be aroused. Therefore, by setting special information as sound information as in feature A1, the start and end timing of the sound production can be made to match the update timing of the production by the operation of the operating means, thereby making it possible to disturb the audience due to the discrepancy. This makes it possible to fully demonstrate the performance effect of the operating means.

Feature A20. A plurality of rotating bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction;
a display section (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
a start operation means (start lever 41) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
a lottery means (a function for executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery to determine whether or not to award a benefit to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) provided for each of the orbiting bodies, and which stops the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body when operated;
Drive control means (a reel controlled by the main controller 101) that starts the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops the rotation of the corresponding orbiting body when the stop operation means is operated. function to execute control processing), and
When the lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position where the symbol is set at a position where the symbol is visible through the display unit, a benefit granting unit (a function for executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) that grants a benefit corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is each of the orbiting bodies,
The drive means is the drive control means,
The predetermined update timing is determined by the drive control means such that a specific symbol (the 16th "red 7" symbol) of a specific orbiting body (left reel 32L) among the orbiting bodies is visible through the display section. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized in that the timing is controlled so that the gaming machine is placed at a specific position.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is performed by the lottery means and the orbiting body starts orbiting, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting body that is orbiting is stopped, and the orbiting body is stopped. In so-called slot machines, where a bonus is awarded by a bonus granting means if the roll corresponds to the lottery result, a sound production that corresponds to the rotation of a rotating body may be performed. Occurs when a specific pattern on the orbiting object is placed at a specific position. In this case, the rotating body continues to revolve until the stop operation means is operated, and the sound effect is generated every time the specific picture reaches the specific position. In such a configuration, if a lag occurs between the timing at which the sound effect occurs and the timing at which the specific picture reaches the specific position, that lag will cumulatively increase each time the orbiting body rotates.

Particularly, for example, in a configuration in which the sound production is performed to assist in pointing a specific symbol, a player who is accustomed to the game may be able to aim at a specific symbol without the need for such assistance in pointing. It is thought that this is possible, and it becomes possible to perform an operation aiming at a specific symbol with a small number of revolutions of the orbiting object. On the other hand, for players who are not used to the game, although it is thought that they try to aim for a specific symbol by relying on the sound effects as an aid to eye-catching, they may not be able to operate the stop operation means due to lack of confidence in the operation. If you hesitate, it is thought that the number of revolutions of the orbiting body will increase accordingly, and the above-mentioned deviation may increase cumulatively. In this case, even though the sound production is intended for a player who requires assistance, there is a possibility that the assistance may be hindered.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, by making the sound generation in response to the special information as sound information be performed before or after the timing when the specific picture reaches the specific position, the start/end timing of the sound effect can be adjusted. It is possible to prevent a lag from the arrival timing of a specific pattern.

Feature A21. comprising volume setting means (a first Vol switch 75, a second Vol switch 76) capable of setting the volume of the sound production by the sound production means in a plurality of stages;
The setting means is capable of setting normal information (sound data) that allows the player to understand the sound generated by the sound generation means,
The sound generating means includes:
When a first volume (sound setting 1) is set by the volume setting means, generating the sound so that the sound corresponding to the normal information has the first volume;
When the volume setting means sets a second volume (sound setting 9) that is larger than the first volume, the sound is generated so that the sound corresponding to the normal information becomes the second volume. On the other hand,
In either of the cases where the first volume is set by the volume setting means and the second volume is set by the volume setting means, it is difficult for the player to understand the sound with respect to the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized in that the sound is generated in a manner that makes it impossible to grasp.

According to the above configuration, by changing the set volume using the volume setting means, the volume of the sound for which normal information is set is changed, but the volume for the sound for which special information is set is changed regardless of the set volume. It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the situation. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the phenomenon in which the start and end timings of the sound production are made to match the update timing of the predetermined production by setting the special information, but they are misaligned depending on the set volume. I can do it.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) A gaming machine equipped with a speaker device 64) including:
The sound information generating means includes:
A first sound information generating means (for example, setting sound data for the first sound source IC 85a by the sub-control device 81) that generates the first sound information (for example, sound data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72(c)) functions) and
Second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72(d)) and third sound information following the second sound information (for example, FIG. 72(d)) a second sound information generating means (for example, a function of executing a process of setting sound data for the second sound source IC 85b by the sub-control device 81);
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound;
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be played back by the sound playback means playing back the sound based on the first sound information and the sound based on the third sound information.

According to the above configuration, when reproducing a series of sounds based on the first sound information and third sound information generated by the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means, the first sound information generating means There is no need to synchronize the sound reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generation means with the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generation means, and a series of sound information of a plurality of sound information can be reproduced with a simple configuration. It becomes possible to perform sound production. For example, as a configuration for synchronizing the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by both sound information generation means, the second sound information is generated by timing the reproduction of the first sound information generated by the first sound information generation means. When starting the reproduction of the third sound information generated by the means, it is necessary to use a predetermined timer, etc., but depending on the update timing of the predetermined timer, the third sound information may You may not be able to start playback. Then, in such a configuration, if the second sound information generating means tries to forcefully generate the third sound information after the first sound information generating means generates the first sound information, the reproduction of the first sound information ends. A discrepancy occurs between the timing, the third sound information, and the playback start timing, and even if you try to perform a superimposed sound production using multiple sound information generating means such as the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means, , there is a possibility that a sufficient presentation effect cannot be obtained due to the deviation, or the presentation effect may even be reduced. On that point, with the above configuration, there is no need to use a timer, and the sound information can be taken over at a timing that does not depend on the timer update timing, so that the effect of sound production by multiple sound information generation means can be fully maximized. It becomes possible to obtain

Feature B2. Fourth sound information having the same reproduction period as the sum of the second sound information and the third sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t13 in FIG. 72(f)), and the fourth sound information following the fourth sound information. A third sound information generating means (for example, setting sound data for the fourth sound source IC 85d by the sub-control device 81) that generates five-tone information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72(f)) processing functions),
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the fourth sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by the sound reproducing means reproducing a sound based on the first sound information, reproducing a sound based on the third sound information, and reproducing a sound based on the fifth sound information. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to the above configuration, when reproducing a series of sounds using the fifth sound information in addition to the first sound information and the third sound information, the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means are used. Not only is there no need to synchronize the generation of sound information, but there is also no need to synchronize the generation of sound information by the third sound information generation means. That is, the configuration that makes it possible to realize a continuous and superimposed sound production by the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means of feature B1 is that the first sound information generation means and the second sound information generation means The configuration is not limited to a set, and can be extended to superimposed sound effects using a plurality of sound information generating means, such as a third sound information generating means, a fourth sound information generating means, etc. It is shown that. In this way, when the number of sound information generation means increases, if the structure is designed to synchronize each sound information generation means, the structure for synchronization may become complicated by the increase in the number of sound information generation means. By using the configuration B2, even if the number of sound information generation means is increased, it is possible to enjoy only the advantage of superimposed sound production, and the configuration does not become complicated. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably realize sound production.

Feature B3. The first sound information generation means continues the first sound information with sixth sound information having the same reproduction period as the second sound information (for example, silent data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c)). It is possible to generate
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein the sound is difficult or impossible for the player to understand depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction period of the first sound information and the sixth sound information generated by the first sound information generation means is the reproduction period of the second sound information and third sound information generated by the second sound information generation means. has the same length. In other words, in a configuration in which sound information is generated by a plurality of sound information generating means, the lengths of the playback periods of each sound information are the same. This makes it possible to decentralize the sound information generation process using the plurality of sound information generation means, and to equalize the processing load of each sound information generation means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent processing failures due to uneven processing.

Feature B4. The first sound information generation means continues the first sound information with sixth sound information having the same reproduction period as the second sound information (for example, silent data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c)). Further, it is possible to generate seventh sound information following the six sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72(c)),
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by the sound reproducing means reproducing a sound based on the first sound information, reproducing a sound based on the third sound information, and reproducing a sound based on the seventh sound information. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

According to the above configuration, the first sound information generating means plays a sound based on the first sound information, the second sound information generating means plays a sound based on the third sound information, and the first sound information generating means plays a seventh sound. A series of sound productions are performed, including the reproduction of sounds based on information. In this way, even after the sound information that is difficult or impossible for the player to understand is set, the sound is played based on the sound information that can be understood by the player. , it becomes possible to effectively utilize each sound information generating means.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the sound reproduction means is capable of starting the reproduction of sound information by each of the sound information generation means simultaneously or substantially simultaneously.

According to the above configuration, for example, in feature B1, the reproduction of sound based on the first sound information by the first sound information generation means and the reproduction of sound based on the second sound information by the second sound information generation means are simultaneous or They will start at approximately the same time. The first sound information and the second sound information are set to have the same playback period, but by starting playback at the same time as described above, the end timing of the first sound information and the end timing of the second sound information As a result, the timing at which the first sound information generating means ends the reproduction of the first sound information and the timing at which the second sound information generating means starts reproducing the third sound information can be made seamless. Therefore, by simply making the lengths of each piece of sound information the same, it is possible to ensure the continuity of a series of sound effects produced by each piece of sound information generating means.

Note that ``can be started at the same time or almost at the same time'' does not mean that they are completely simultaneous; This also includes cases in which it is possible to start.

Feature B6. The sound reproduction means is provided in correspondence with each of the sound information generation means,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein each of the sound reproduction means generates the sound information generated by the corresponding sound information generation means.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature B5, and such a configuration allows the effect of feature B5 to be more effectively achieved.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the sound reproducing means are installed so that at least one of the output direction and installation position of the sound to be reproduced is different.

According to the above configuration, if the output direction or installation position of the same sound is different, the sound perceived by the player will be different. This makes it possible to enhance the significance of reproducing superimposed sound.

Feature B8. sound source information storage means (sound source data storage area 83e) for storing sound source information (sound source data) to be reproduced by the sound reproduction means;
sound information storage means (data output area 84a) for storing the sound information generated by the sound information generation means;
Equipped with
The sound reproduction means
acquisition means for acquiring the sound source information from the sound source information storage means based on the sound information stored in the sound information storage means (a function for executing the process of step S3104 by the sound source IC 85);
a reproduction means for reproducing the sound source information acquired by the acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S3107 by the sound source IC 85);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the sound reproduction means reproduces sound based on the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, the sound information is combined with the data generated by the sound information generation means and reproduced by the sound reproduction means. It will play the role of linking the data. That is, the sound reproduction means obtains sound source information based on the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, and performs sound production by reproducing the sound source information. In this way, by using sound information, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of data to be exchanged, compared to, for example, a configuration in which sound source information is generated each time.

Feature B9. Based on a predetermined performance trigger, a specific performance execution means (sub control (a function for executing production data setting processing by the device 81),
According to any one of features B1 to B8, the specific effect execution means causes the predetermined effect to be started at the same or substantially the same timing as the start timing of the sound effect by the sound reproduction means. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the sound production is started at the same time or substantially simultaneously with the predetermined production, the sound production is configured to generate superimposed sound information by a plurality of sound information generation means, and each sound It becomes possible to easily synchronize the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the sound information generated by the information generation means with the start timing of each predetermined performance. In this way, by applying a configuration that allows for easy synchronization while superimposing sound productions like Feature B1 to synchronization with other productions, it is possible to not only superimpose sound productions but also to synchronize them with other productions. By combining this, it becomes possible to realize a highly effective presentation with a simple configuration.

Feature B10. The predetermined effect is a display effect in which a display frame is updated at a predetermined period,
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein each of the sound information has a playback length that is an integral multiple of the predetermined cycle that is an update cycle of the display frame.

According to the above configuration, the timing at which the reproduction of the sound based on the first sound information (second sound information) ends, that is, the timing at which the reproduction of the sound based on the third sound information starts coincides with the update timing of the display frame. In this way, by setting the playback length of the sound information in relation to the update cycle of the display frame, it is possible to easily match the update timing of the display effect with the switching timing of the sound information that is the base of the sound playback. This makes it possible to avoid discrepancies between display and sound.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A gaming machine equipped with a predetermined performance execution means (a function for executing performance data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) that executes a predetermined performance at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a predetermined performance opportunity,
The predetermined performance execution means is
Sound production execution means (sound production execution means) capable of executing a sound production as the predetermined production by a sound generation means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87) that controls sound production based on predetermined sound information. (a function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81),
The sound production execution means includes:
a generation control updating means (a function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) for updating the generation control by the sound generation means at a predetermined specific period (10 msec period);
The sound information includes special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp when the sound generation control is performed by the sound generation means, and the sound generation control based on the special information is performed at the predetermined timing. A first control means (step S3007, step S3008, step S3011, step function to execute processing such as S3012),
A second control means (a step by the sub-control device 81) that controls the sound generation means so that the sound generation control based on the special information is followed by the sound generation control based on the sound information corresponding to the predetermined effect. A function to execute the processing of S3004, Step S3008, Step S3012, etc.);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In the configuration in which a predetermined performance is performed at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a performance opportunity, in the above configuration, a sound performance is performed as the predetermined performance by controlling the sound generation by the sound generation means. The sound generation control by the sound generation means is executed at a specific cycle, and depending on the length of the specific cycle and the execution timing of the predetermined effect, the update timing of the specific cycle, that is, the update timing of the sound generation control and the execution of the predetermined effect. There may be a difference in the timing, that is, the timing at which the sound production should be performed. In this regard, in the above configuration, the generation of sound regarding special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp is performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation, and then the sound generation is controlled to correspond to the predetermined effect. Sound generation control is performed based on the sound information. Therefore, even if there is a discrepancy between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound production should be executed as described above, the sound generation control will be started from the update timing at which the discrepancy remains. By doing so, it becomes possible to start the sound production from a predetermined timing. This makes it possible to suitably perform sound production without requiring complicated configuration changes such as changing the update cycle in order to eliminate the above-mentioned discrepancies.

Feature C2. A grasping means for grasping the amount of deviation between the predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific cycle based on the occurrence of the production opportunity (processing of steps S3005, S3007, steps S3009 to S3011, etc. by the sub-control device 81) ),
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first control means controls the sound generation means so that sound generation control is performed based on the special information based on the grasping result by the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound production should be executed is appropriately grasped based on the generation of the production opportunity. By doing this, a configuration that can accommodate diversification of the amount of deviation can be achieved, and it becomes possible to perform sound production more suitably.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the grasping means grasps the amount of deviation so that the specific period is shorter than the length of the specific cycle.

According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, the period during which sound generation control is performed based on special information can be shortened, and the amount of sound information to be set can be reduced.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the grasping means grasps the amount of deviation between the update timing immediately before the predetermined timing and the predetermined timing among the update timings of the specific period.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to minimize the amount of deviation. Therefore, the length of the specific period during which sound generation control is performed based on the special information becomes the shortest, and it becomes possible to reduce the data amount of sound information to be set.

Feature C5. The sound generating means includes a first sound generating means and a second sound generating means,
The predetermined timing for performing the predetermined performance when the performance opportunity occurs is a first predetermined timing for performing a first sound performance using a sound whose generation is controlled by the first sound generation means, and the second sound production. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the second predetermined timing for executing the second sound effect using the sound generated and controlled by the means is set to be a different timing.

According to the above configuration, the plurality of sound generation means are provided, and the predetermined timing at which the sound production by the sound generated and controlled by each sound generation means is to be executed is different. In such a configuration, by applying the configuration of feature C1, it is possible to separately adjust the start timing of control when controlling performances that start at different timings even if they are based on the same performance trigger. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably execute each sound production without complicating the processing configuration.

Feature C6. comprising a setting means (a function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) for setting the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the second control means,
The setting means sets the setting of the sound information used for controlling sound generation by the first control means and the setting of the sound information used for controlling sound generation by the second control means to the first predetermined value. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that the game is performed at a timing based on the performance opportunity, regardless of the timing and the second predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the setting of the sound information for the first sound generation means and the second sound generation means is performed at the timing based on the performance trigger, regardless of the execution timing of the first sound production and the second sound production. . By doing so, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of waiting forever without setting the sound information depending on the execution timing of the sound production.

Feature C7. The first control means includes:
The sound generation control based on the special information by the first sound generation means is carried out over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the first predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period of the first sound generation means. control what is done,
The sound generation control based on the special information by the second sound generation means is performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the second predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period of the second sound generation means. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, characterized in that the gaming machine is controlled so that the game is played.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution timing of each sound production deviates from a specific period, sound generation control is performed based on special information over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation, so that any It is also possible to start the sound production at the desired execution timing, even if there is a lag with the update timing.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) A gaming machine equipped with a speaker device 64) including:
having a plurality of the sound reproduction means,
The sound information generation means is configured to perform a first reproduction period (for example, during which sound is reproduced by a first sound reproduction means (for example, a first sound source IC 85a, a first amplifier 86a, and a first speaker 87a) among the plurality of sound reproduction means). , the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72(c)), and the sound is produced by a second sound reproduction means (for example, a second sound source IC 85b, a second amplifier 86b, a second speaker 87b) different from the first sound reproduction means. The second reproduction period to be reproduced (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72(d)) overlaps with the overlapping period (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72(c) and FIG. 72(d)) 72(c), a specific period (for example, the period from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c), 72(d), the period from t11 to t12 and the period from t13 to t14).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration that realizes a superimposed sound effect by overlapping the sound reproduction periods of the plurality of sound reproduction means, the player can grasp the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproduction means. It is possible to have cases in which the sounds overlap and cases in which they do not overlap, without having to turn on/off the reproduction of each sound, since there will be certain periods of time that will be difficult or impossible to grasp. By doing so, it becomes possible to adjust the degree of overlapping of sound effects in stages with a simple configuration. Therefore, sound production can be performed suitably.

Feature D2. The sound information generation means is configured to provide a second sound reproduction means in which, during the specific period, the special sound is played back by the first sound playback means, while a normal sound that can be grasped by the player is played back by the second sound playback means. generating the sound information such that a second specific period occurs in which the normal sound is played by the first sound playback unit and the special sound is played by the second sound playback unit; The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is capable of performing the following.

According to the above configuration, when realizing superimposed sound production by both sound reproduction means, it is possible to create a period in which sound production is performed by only one of the sound reproduction means. Moreover, such a configuration can be realized by continuously playing the normal sound and the specific sound without turning on/off the sound playback, and it is possible to obtain a better presentation effect without increasing the processing load. becomes possible.

Feature D3. The sound information generating means may generate the sound information so that the second specific period occurs following the first specific period, or the first specific period occurs following the second specific period. The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the gaming machine is capable of.

According to the above configuration, a configuration in which the timings of on/off control in both sound reproduction means overlap can be realized without performing such on/off control. That is, when the second specific period is caused to occur following the first specific period, normally, at the boundary, the first sound reproduction means is turned on and the second sound reproduction means is turned off. There is a need to do. Further, when the first specific period is caused to occur following the second specific period, normally, at the boundary, the first sound reproduction means is controlled to turn off, and the first sound reproduction means is controlled to be turned on. There is a need to do. If the timing of these on/off controls deviates, there may be a period in which both sounds cannot be heard. On that point, in the above configuration, the switching between the two specific periods is performed by continuous playback of the special sound and the normal sound without using such on/off control, so there is no inconvenience caused by a shift in control timing, etc. , it becomes possible to produce effects by generating both specific periods.

Feature D4. The sound information generation means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction by both sound reproduction means ends at the same time. By doing this, for example, when playing back sound in a so-called loop performance, there is a situation where there is a sound playback means that has already finished playing the sound and a sound playback means that has not finished playing the sound. Does not occur. Thereby, there is no need to vary the control depending on whether or not the reproduction of these sounds ends, and it becomes possible to perform uniform control and simplify the processing configuration. Moreover, since the special sound is played at the same end timing depending on the specific period, the above effect can be achieved without having to reconsider the harmony of the sound in the presentation, such as taking into consideration the overlap of the normal sound. becomes possible.

Note that "the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period overlap" means "the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period overlap". It may be expressed as "at the same or substantially the same timing." In this case, "the same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or has difficulty understanding the difference in timing."

Feature D5. The length of a first specific period during which the first sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound by the sound information generating means and a second specific period during which the second sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the sound information is generated differently, so that the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period overlap.

According to the above configuration, by setting the sound information for the special sounds having different playback lengths, the sound reproduction by both sound reproduction means ends at the same time. By doing so, even if the reproduction periods of the normal sounds by both sound reproduction means are different from each other, it is possible to achieve the effect of feature D4.

Feature D6. As the sound production performed by the sound reproduction means, after the reproduction of the sound of the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound of the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means are completed, the sound production is performed again. , a specific sound production (loop production) is set for starting the reproduction of the sound of the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound of the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means; The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5.

According to the above configuration, when restarting sound reproduction by each sound reproduction means in a so-called loop performance as a specific sound performance, since the reproduction of all sounds ends at the same timing, the final and final timings are adjusted to align the restart timing. There is no need to wait until the end of the sound reproduction by the sound reproduction means. In other words, when any sound reproduction means finishes reproducing its own sound, it suffices to resume sound reproduction, and there is no need for a configuration for checking the trends of other sound reproduction means. Therefore, loop performance can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature D7. The sound information generation means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the start timing of the first playback period and the start timing of the second playback period overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction of sounds by both sound reproduction means starts at the same time. By doing this, in realizing a superimposed sound production by both sound reproduction means based on the production trigger, the timing to start the reproduction of the sound reproduction means on the side that is not starting playback can be determined after the production trigger. No need arises. Therefore, it is possible to realize a superimposed sound effect with a simple configuration. Moreover, in order to have the same start timing depending on the specific period in which the sound is played based on the special information, the above method can be applied without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of the normal sound. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Note that "the start timing of the first playback period and the start timing of the second playback period overlap" means "the start timing of the first playback period and the start timing of the second playback period overlap". It may be expressed as "at the same or substantially the same timing." In this case, "the same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or has difficulty understanding the difference in timing."

Feature D8. Feature D1 characterized in that the sound information generation means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the first playback period and the second playback period have the same length. The gaming machine according to any one of D7 to D7.

According to the above configuration, the period of sound reproduction by the first sound reproduction means and the period of reproduction of sound by the second sound reproduction means are of the same length, thereby realizing a superimposed sound production by the plurality of sound reproduction means. In doing so, it becomes possible to evenly distribute the processing load. This makes it possible to avoid an increase in local processing load. Moreover, since the special sound is played during the same playback period depending on the specific period, the above effect can be achieved without having to reconsider the harmony of the sound in the production, such as taking into consideration the overlap of the normal sound. becomes possible.

Feature D9. The sound information generating means is configured such that the overlapping period is the specific period, the start timing of the second playback period occurs after the start timing of the first playback period, and further after the end timing of the first playback period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the predetermined sound information can be set so that the end timing of the second playback period occurs.

According to the above configuration, the first playback period and the second playback period are set to have an overlapping period that overlaps each other, but there is a difference between the periods. During the overlapping period, one of the sounds becomes a special sound and the player cannot understand it. In this way, continuous sound production can be realized without interruption by multiple sound reproduction means, such as sound generation by the first sound reproduction means and sound generation by the second sound reproduction means. .

Note that it is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of other feature A groups to feature D groups to each of the configurations of feature A groups to feature D groups described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying a combination of technical ideas, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 32... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop switch, 64... Speaker device, 65... Liquid crystal display device, 81... Display control device, 82... CPU, 85... Sound source IC, 86... Amplifier , 87...Individual speaker, 101...Main control device, 102...CPU, 201...Display control device, 202...CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising a sound reproduction means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by a sound information generation means,
The sound information generating means includes:
a first sound information generation means for generating first sound information;
a second sound information generating means for generating second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information and third sound information following the second sound information;
Equipped with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to understand the sound;
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be played back by the sound playback means playing back the sound based on the first sound information and the sound based on the third sound information.

Images